Furuno GD-1920C-BB Marine RADAR User manual

IMPORTANT NOTICES

General

• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual.

Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.

• Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.

• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.

• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.

• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment settings.

• Save this manual for future reference.

• Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by

FURUNO will cancel the warranty.

• All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders.

How to discard this product

Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance

(http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal.

How to discard a used battery

Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery(ies), see the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery(ies) is used.

In the European Union

The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site.

Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU.

In the USA

The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that

Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled.

Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws.

Ni-Cd Pb

Cd

In the other countries

There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the future.

i

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

Do not open the equipment.

Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment.

Turn off the radar power switch before servicing the antenna unit. Post a warning sign near the switch indicating it should not be turned on while the antenna unit is being serviced.

Prevent the potential risk of being struck by the rotating antenna and exposure to

RF radiation hazard.

Wear a safety belt and hard hat when working on the antenna unit.

Serious injury or death can result if someone falls from the radar antenna mast.

Do not disassemble or modify the equipment.

Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can result.

Turn off the power immediately if water leaks into the equipment or the equipment is emitting smoke or fire.

Continued use of the equipment can cause fire or electrical shock.

Use the proper fuse.

Fuse rating is shown on the power cable.

Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage to the equipment.

Keep heater away from equipment.

Heat can alter equipment shape and melt the power cord, which can cause fire or electrical shock.

WARNING

Radio Frequency

Radiation Hazard

The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy which can be harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close distance.

Distances at which RF radiation levels of

100 and 10 W/m

2

exist are given in the table below.

Note:

If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house, your administration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna revolution. This is possible - Ask your FURUNO representative or dealer to provide this feature.

MODEL

MODEL

1824C-BB

MODEL

1834C-BB

MODEL

1934C-BB

MODEL

1944C-BB

MODEL

1954C-

BB

XN-12A

XN-13A

MODEL

1964C-

BB

XN-12A

XN-13A

Distance to

100 W/m

2 point

Nil

Nil

Worst case

0.10 m

Nil

Worst case

0.20 m

Nil

Worst case

0.50 m

Worst case

0.40 m

Distance to

10 W/m 2 point

Worst case

0.70 m

Worst case

1.50 m

Worst case

1.70 m

Worst case

1.20 m

Worst case

2.00 m

Worst case

1.40 m

Worst case

5.40 m

Worst case

3.60 m

Warning Label

A warning label is attached to the equipment. Do not remove the label.

If the label is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer.

WARNING

To avoid electrical shock, do not remove cover. No user-serviceable parts inside.

Name: Warning Label (1)

Type: 86-003-1011-0

Code No.: 100-236-230

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FOREWORD................................................................................................................. viii

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS......................................................................................... x

1 OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ................................................................................. 1-1

1.1

Operating Controls ............................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1.1

Control unit............................................................................................................. 1-1

1.2

Inserting a Chart Card ........................................................................................................ 1-3

1.3

Turning the Unit On/Off ...................................................................................................... 1-4

1.4

Adjusting Hue, Panel Illumination....................................................................................... 1-5

1.5

Selecting a Display............................................................................................................. 1-6

1.5.1

Display modes........................................................................................................ 1-6

1.5.2

Selecting a display ................................................................................................. 1-7

1.5.3

Switching control in combination and overlay screens........................................... 1-8

1.5.4

Selecting image source.......................................................................................... 1-9

1.6

Trackball, Cursor .............................................................................................................. 1-10

1.7

Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as Destination ......................................................1-11

1.8

Data Boxes....................................................................................................................... 1-12

1.8.1

Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key ............................................................ 1-12

1.8.2

Rearranging data boxes....................................................................................... 1-12

1.8.3

Temporarily erasing a data box ............................................................................ 1-12

1.9

Function Keys................................................................................................................... 1-13

1.10

Simulation Display............................................................................................................ 1-14

2 RADAR OPERATION ............................................................................................ 2-1

2.1

Radar Display..................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2

Transmitting, Stand-by........................................................................................................ 2-1

2.3

Tuning................................................................................................................................. 2-2

2.4

Adjusting the Gain .............................................................................................................. 2-2

2.5

Reducing Sea Clutter ......................................................................................................... 2-3

2.5.1

How the A/C SEA works......................................................................................... 2-3

2.5.2

Adjusting the A/C SEA ........................................................................................... 2-4

2.6

Reducing Precipitation Clutter............................................................................................ 2-4

2.6.1

Adjusting the A/C RAIN .......................................................................................... 2-4

2.7

Range Scale....................................................................................................................... 2-5

2.8

Pulselength......................................................................................................................... 2-5

2.9

Presentation Mode ............................................................................................................. 2-6

2.9.1

Selecting a presentation mode............................................................................... 2-6

2.9.2

Description of presentation modes......................................................................... 2-7

2.10

Measuring the Range ......................................................................................................... 2-8

2.10.1

Measuring range by range rings ............................................................................ 2-8

2.10.2

Measuring range by cursor .................................................................................... 2-8

2.10.3

Measuring range by VRM ...................................................................................... 2-9

2.10.4 Various VRM operations.......................................................................................... 2-9

2.11

Measuring the Bearing ..................................................................................................... 2-10

2.11.1

Measuring bearing by cursor................................................................................ 2-10

2.11.2

Measuring bearing by EBL................................................................................... 2-10

2.11.3 Various EBL operations ......................................................................................... 2-10

2.12

Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker...........................................................................2-11

2.13

Reducing Noise Interference.............................................................................................2-11

2.14

Rejecting Radar Interference ............................................................................................2-11

iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.15

Zoom .................................................................................................................................2-12

2.15.1

Zooming radar targets...........................................................................................2-12

2.15.2

Zooming ARP, TTM targets ...................................................................................2-13

2.16

Shifting the Picture ............................................................................................................2-14

2.16.1

Manual shift...........................................................................................................2-14

2.16.2

Automatic shift.......................................................................................................2-14

2.17

Using the Offset EBL.........................................................................................................2-15

2.17.1

Predicting collision course.....................................................................................2-15

2.17.2

Measuring range & bearing between two targets..................................................2-16

2.18

Echo Trails.........................................................................................................................2-17

2.18.1

Trail time................................................................................................................2-17

2.18.2

Starting echo trails.................................................................................................2-18

2.18.3

Trail gradation .......................................................................................................2-18

2.18.4

Trail color...............................................................................................................2-18

2.18.5

Echo trail mode .....................................................................................................2-19

2.19

Echo Stretch......................................................................................................................2-19

2.20

Echo Averaging .................................................................................................................2-20

2.21

Outputting TLL Data ..........................................................................................................2-21

2.22

Guard Alarm ......................................................................................................................2-22

2.22.1

Setting a guard alarm zone...................................................................................2-22

2.22.2

When the alarm is violated… ................................................................................2-23

2.22.3

Cancelling the guard alarm ...................................................................................2-23

2.23

Watchman .........................................................................................................................2-23

2.23.1

How watchman works ...........................................................................................2-23

2.23.2

Turning on/off watchman.......................................................................................2-23

2.23.3

Setting watchman stand-by interval ......................................................................2-24

2.24

Suppressing Second-trace Echoes...................................................................................2-24

2.25

Waypoint Marker ...............................................................................................................2-25

2.26

ARP, TTM Operation .........................................................................................................2-26

2.26.1

Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM .........................................................................2-27

2.26.2

Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP)....................................................................2-27

2.26.3

Displaying target number (ARP, TTM) ..................................................................2-29

2.26.4

Terminating tracking of ARP targets......................................................................2-29

2.26.5

Setting vector attributes (ARP)..............................................................................2-30

2.26.6

Displaying past position (ARP)..............................................................................2-31

2.26.7

ARP, TTM target data............................................................................................2-31

2.26.8

CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP) ........................................................................................2-32

2.26.9

Lost target alarm (ARP) ........................................................................................2-33

2.27

Interpreting the Radar Display ..........................................................................................2-34

2.27.1

False echoes.........................................................................................................2-34

2.27.2

SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) ............................................................2-35

2.27.3

Racon (Radar Beacon) .........................................................................................2-36

3 PLOTTER OPERATION.........................................................................................3-1

3.1

Plotter Displays ...................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1

Full-screen plotter display .......................................................................................3-1

3.1.2

Nav graphic display.................................................................................................3-3

3.1.3

Highway display ......................................................................................................3-6

3.1.4

Nav data display......................................................................................................3-7

3.2

Presentation Mode ..............................................................................................................3-8

3.3

Shifting the Display..............................................................................................................3-9

3.4

Chart Scale..........................................................................................................................3-9

3.5

Chart Cards .........................................................................................................................3-9

3.5.1

Chart card overview ................................................................................................3-9

3.5.2

Indices and chart enlargement..............................................................................3-10

3.5.3

Navionics GOLD charts.........................................................................................3-11

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.5.4

C-MAP charts ....................................................................................................... 3-14

3.6

Working with Track ........................................................................................................... 3-18

3.6.1

Displaying track.................................................................................................... 3-18

3.6.2

Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track...................................................... 3-19

3.6.3

Changing track color ............................................................................................ 3-19

3.6.4

Track plotting method and interval for own ship track.......................................... 3-20

3.6.5

Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting............................................... 3-21

3.6.6

Erasing track ........................................................................................................ 3-22

3.7

Marks, Lines ..................................................................................................................... 3-23

3.7.1

Entering a mark, line ............................................................................................ 3-23

3.7.2

Changing mark attributes ..................................................................................... 3-24

3.7.3

Selecting line type ................................................................................................ 3-24

3.7.4

Erasing marks, lines............................................................................................. 3-25

3.8

Waypoints......................................................................................................................... 3-26

3.8.1

Entering waypoints............................................................................................... 3-26

3.8.2

Editing waypoint data ........................................................................................... 3-29

3.8.3

Erasing waypoints ................................................................................................ 3-30

3.8.4

Changing waypoint mark size (Navionics GOLD charts) ..................................... 3-31

3.8.5

Searching waypoints ............................................................................................ 3-32

3.9

Routes .............................................................................................................................. 3-33

3.9.1

Creating routes..................................................................................................... 3-33

3.9.2

Connecting routes ................................................................................................ 3-36

3.9.3

Inserting waypoints............................................................................................... 3-37

3.9.4

Removing waypoints from a route........................................................................ 3-38

3.9.5

Erasing routes ...................................................................................................... 3-39

3.10

Navigation ........................................................................................................................ 3-39

3.10.1

Navigating to a “quick point”................................................................................. 3-39

3.10.2

Navigating to waypoints ....................................................................................... 3-40

3.10.3

Navigating to ports, port services (NavChart

TM

only) ........................................... 3-41

3.10.4

Following a route.................................................................................................. 3-43

3.10.5 Canceling route navigation................................................................................... 3-46

3.11

Alarms .............................................................................................................................. 3-47

3.11.1

Audio alarm on/off ................................................................................................ 3-47

3.11.2

Arrival alarm ......................................................................................................... 3-48

3.11.3

Anchor watch alarm ............................................................................................. 3-49

3.11.4

XTE (Cross-Track Error) alarm ............................................................................ 3-50

3.11.5

Speed alarm ......................................................................................................... 3-50

3.11.6

Proximity alarm..................................................................................................... 3-51

3.11.7

Trip alarm ............................................................................................................. 3-51

3.11.8

Grounding alarm (C-MAP specification)............................................................... 3-52

3.11.9

Alarm information ................................................................................................. 3-53

3.12

Resetting Trip Distance .................................................................................................... 3-55

4 VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION ........................................................................... 4-1

4.1

Sounder Displays ............................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1

Selecting a sounder display ................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.2

Description of sounder displays ............................................................................. 4-2

4.1.3

Selecting screen split method in combination displays.......................................... 4-6

4.2

Automatic Sounder Operation ............................................................................................ 4-6

4.2.1

How the automatic sounder works ......................................................................... 4-6

4.2.2

Types of automatic sounder modes ....................................................................... 4-6

4.2.3

How to enable automatic sounder operation.......................................................... 4-7

4.3

Manual Sounder Operation ................................................................................................ 4-7

4.3.1

Selecting the manual mode.................................................................................... 4-7

4.3.2

Selecting display range .......................................................................................... 4-7

4.3.3

Adjusting the gain................................................................................................... 4-8

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.3.4

Shifting the range ....................................................................................................4-8

4.4

Measuring Depth, Time .......................................................................................................4-9

4.5

Reducing Interference.........................................................................................................4-9

4.6

Reducing Low Level Noise................................................................................................4-10

4.7

Erasing Weak Echoes .......................................................................................................4-11

4.8

White Marker .....................................................................................................................4-12

4.9

Picture Advance Speed .....................................................................................................4-12

4.9.1

Advancement independent of ship’s speed ..........................................................4-12

4.9.2

Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed......................................................4-13

4.10

Display Colors ...................................................................................................................4-14

4.11

Alarms ...............................................................................................................................4-15

4.11.1

Audio alarm on/off .................................................................................................4-15

4.11.2

Bottom alarm.........................................................................................................4-16

4.11.3

Fish alarm .............................................................................................................4-16

4.11.4

Fish alarm (B/L).....................................................................................................4-17

4.11.5

Water temperature alarm ......................................................................................4-17

4.11.6

When an alarm setting is violated... ......................................................................4-18

4.12

Water Temperature Graph.................................................................................................4-19

4.13

Changing Pulse Repetition Rate .......................................................................................4-19

4.14

Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card.............................................................................4-19

4.15

Interpreting the Sounder Display.......................................................................................4-20

4.15.1

Zero line ................................................................................................................4-20

4.15.2

Bottom echo ..........................................................................................................4-20

4.15.3

Fish school echoes ...............................................................................................4-21

4.15.4

Surface noise/Aeration..........................................................................................4-21

5 AIS OPERATION ...................................................................................................5-1

5.1

Turning AIS Feature On/Off.................................................................................................5-1

5.2

AIS Symbols........................................................................................................................5-3

5.3

Setting Number of AIS Targets to Display ...........................................................................5-3

5.4

Activating Targets ................................................................................................................5-4

5.5

Displaying Target Data ........................................................................................................5-4

5.6

Lost Target...........................................................................................................................5-5

5.7

Setting CPA and TCPA........................................................................................................5-5

5.8

Proximity Alarm ...................................................................................................................5-6

5.9

Showing, Hiding AIS Target Tracks .....................................................................................5-7

5.10

Choosing Vector Time .........................................................................................................5-7

5.11

Displaying Past Positions of AIS Targets.............................................................................5-8

6 DATA TRANSFER..................................................................................................6-1

6.1

Memory Card Operations....................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1

Deleting all data (other than chart data) from memory cards..................................6-1

6.1.2

Saving data to a memory card ................................................................................6-2

6.1.3

Playing back data from a memory card...................................................................6-3

6.2

Receiving Data Via Network Equipment .............................................................................6-4

6.3

Outputting Data Through the Network.................................................................................6-5

7 CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT..................................................................................7-1

7.1

General Setup .....................................................................................................................7-1

7.2

Radar Setup ........................................................................................................................7-4

7.2.1

Radar display setup ................................................................................................7-4

7.2.2

Radar range setup ..................................................................................................7-7

7.2.3

Function key setup ..................................................................................................7-8

7.3

Plotter Setup......................................................................................................................7-10

7.3.1

Navigation options.................................................................................................7-10

7.3.2

Function key setup ................................................................................................7-11

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.4

Chart Setup ...................................................................................................................... 7-13

7.4.1

Chart offset........................................................................................................... 7-13

7.4.2

Navionics GOLD chart attributes ......................................................................... 7-14

7.4.3

C-MAP chart attributes......................................................................................... 7-15

7.5

Data Boxes Setup ............................................................................................................ 7-21

7.6

Hot Page Setup ................................................................................................................ 7-22

7.7

Navigator Setup................................................................................................................ 7-23

7.7.1

Navigation data source......................................................................................... 7-23

7.7.2

FURUNO BB GPS receiver setup........................................................................ 7-25

7.7.3

TD display setup .................................................................................................. 7-28

7.8

Nav Data Display Setup ................................................................................................... 7-30

7.9

Sounder Setup ................................................................................................................. 7-31

7.9.1

System setup........................................................................................................ 7-31

7.9.2

Sensor setup ........................................................................................................ 7-34

7.9.3

Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range ................................................ 7-35

7.9.4

Function key setup ............................................................................................... 7-36

7.10

Nav Graphic Display Setup .............................................................................................. 7-38

8 MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................. 8-1

8.1

Preventive Maintenance..................................................................................................... 8-1

8.2

Replacement of Batteries ................................................................................................... 8-2

8.3

Replacement of Fuse ......................................................................................................... 8-2

8.4

Replacing the Magnetron ................................................................................................... 8-3

8.5

Replacing the Synchro Belt (1824C-BB only) .................................................................... 8-3

8.6

Trackball Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 8-3

8.7

Simple Troubleshooting...................................................................................................... 8-4

8.7.1

General................................................................................................................... 8-4

8.7.2

Radar...................................................................................................................... 8-4

8.7.3

Plotter..................................................................................................................... 8-5

8.7.4

Sounder.................................................................................................................. 8-6

8.8

Diagnostics......................................................................................................................... 8-7

8.8.1

Memory I/O test...................................................................................................... 8-7

8.8.2

Test pattern........................................................................................................... 8-10

8.8.3

Keyboard test ........................................................................................................8-11

8.9

GPS Status Display .......................................................................................................... 8-12

8.10

Clearing Memories ........................................................................................................... 8-13

8.11

Error Messages ................................................................................................................ 8-14

APPENDIX................................................................................................................. AP-1

Menu Overview .........................................................................................................................AP-1

Geodetic Chart List .................................................................................................................AP-10

Icons ........................................................................................................................................ AP-11

SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1

INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1

Declaration of Conformity vii

FOREWORD

A Word to the Owner of the Model

18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB Series Marine Radar,

GD-1920C-BB Color Video Plotter

FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the Model 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB

Series Marine Radar, GD-1920C-BB Color Video Plotter. We are confident you will discover why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.

For over 60 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers.

Your equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly installed and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance procedures set forth in this manual.

We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our purposes.

Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.

Features

The 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB Radar Series and the GD-1920C-BB Video Plotter work within our network system called the “NavNet.” Each product has an IP address to communicate with NavNet compatible products within the network, using TCP/IP protocol through an

Ethernet 10BASE-T network.

The main features are as follows:

• This Navnet series consists of the following models:

Model Output

Marine Radar Model 1824C-BB

Marine Radar Model 1834C-BB 4 kW

Marine Radar Model 1934C-BB

Marine Radar Model 1944C-BB

Marine Radar Model 1954C-BB

2.2 kW 24 nm

4 kW

6 kW

12 kW

Marine Radar Model 1964C-BB 25 kW

Color Video Plotter GD-1920C-BB —

36 nm

48 nm

64 nm

72 nm

—

46 cm, radome, 24/30 rpm

(auto-switching)

60 cm, radome, 24 rpm

3.5 ft, open, 24 or 48 rpm

4 ft, open, 24 or 48 rpm

4/6 ft, open, 24 rpm (4 or 6 ft),

48 rpm (4 ft only)

—

viii

FOREWORD

• User friendly operation with combination of discrete keys, soft keys, alphanumeric keys and Trackball.

• Accepts the following SD chart cards: Navionics GOLD charts or C-MAP NT

+

/NT MAX charts depending on specification. All names mentioned above are registered trademarks of their respective companies.

• Fast chart redraw.

• Built-in NavNet interface circuit board.

• Video input (video recorder, CCD device, etc.) available with installation of optional PIP

Board.

• Highly accurate, WAAS-capable 12-channel FURUNO BB GPS Receiver GP-320B/330B and Weather Station WS-200 optionally available. (Hereafer these models are collectively referred to as FURUNO BB GPS receiver.)

• User programmable function keys.

• Video sounder picture available with connection of the optional Network Sounder

ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N.

• The optional facsimile receiver FAX-30 receives facsimile pictures and navtex messages transmitted from facsimile and navtex stations.

ix

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

All NavNet products incorporate a “network circuit board” to integrate each NavNet product on board through an optional LAN cable (Ethernet 10BASE-T). Each NavNet product is assigned an IP address to enable transfer of images between other NavNet products. For example, video plotter pictures can be transferred to a radar and vice versa. Pictures received via the NavNet may be adjusted at the receiving end.

The number of processor units which may be installed depends on the number of network sounder connected. For a system incorporating three or more products, a “hub” is required to process data.

For one network sounder: one radar and three plotters, or four plotters

For two network sounder: one radar and two plotters, or four plotters

Note: NavNet2 equipment cannot be connected to initial version NavNet equipment.

NavNet system (Model 1824C-BB/1834C-BB/1934C-BB/1944C-BB/1954C-BB/

1964C-BB)

MODEL

1964C

MODEL

1954C

Antenna Unit

MODEL

1934C

MODEL

1944C

MODEL1824C

MODEL

1834C

GPS Receiver

GP-320B/330B

OR

Weather Station

WS-200

AIS transponder

Power Supply Unit

PSU-005

(MODEL 1954C)

Power Supply Unit

PSU-008

(MODEL 1964C)

AIS Interface

IF-1500AIS*

* Not required for AIS

Transponder FA-150

ARPA

ARP-11

(Built-in)

Display unit

RDP-149

Echo sounder

Navigator

External buzzer

PC

VGA monitor

Remote display

Video equipment

Heading sensor

HUB

FA-30

AIS RECEIVER

Rectifier

RU-3423

Facsimile

Receiver

FAX-30

x

100/110/115/220/230 VAC

1 φ, 50/60 Hz*

12 - 24 VDC*

: Standard

: Option

: Local supply

*: The power for the power supply unit

and display unit must be drawn from

the same power source.

Network

Sounder

ETR-6/10N

ETR-30N

Other NavNet unit

(GD-1920C, etc.)

NavNet system (Model 1824C-BB/1834C-BB/1934C-BB/1944C-BB/1954C-BB/1964C-BB)

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1920C-BB)

GPS Receiver

GP-320B/330B or

Weather Station WS-200

External buzzer

* Not required for AIS

Transponder FA-150

AIS transponder

AIS Interface

IF-1500AIS*

Remote

Controller

RMC-100

Display unit

RDP-149

VGA monitor

Remote display

PC

Video equipment

ARPA

ARP-11

HUB

Echo sounder

Navigator

Other NavNet Unit

(Model 1834C, etc.)

FA-30

AIS RECEIVER

Facsimile

Receiver

FAX-30

Network

Sounder

ETR-6/10N

ETR-30N

12 - 24 VDC

Rectifier

PR-62

: Standard

: Option

: Local supply

100/110/115/220/230 VAC

1 φ, 50/60 Hz

Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1920C-BB)

xi

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

Two-unit NavNet system

Radar Antenna Unit,

GPS Receiver

GP-320B/330B,

OR

Weather Station WS-200

Radar Antenna Unit,

GPS Receiver

GP-320B/330B,

OR

Weather Station WS-200

RADAR or

PLOTTER

Radar, plotter data

Radar, plotter data

Two-unit NavNet system

Three-or-more-unit NavNet system (Max. 4 units)

Radar Antenna Unit,

GPS Receiver

GP-320B/330B,

OR

Weather Station WS-200

Radar Antenna Unit,

GPS Receiver

GP-320B/330B,

OR

Weather Station WS-200

RADAR or

PLOTTER

RADAR or

PLOTTER

RADAR or

PLOTTER

Radar data

Plotter data

HUB

Sounder data

Network Sounder

ETR-6/10N

ETR-30N

(option)

Facsimile data

Facsimile

Receiver

FAX-30

(option)

Sounder data

Note: The picture disappears

10 seconds after the NavNet cable is disconnected from a

"sub" NavNet display unit.

Network Sounder

ETR-6/10N

ETR-30N

(option)

Three-or-more-unit NavNet system

xii

This chapter provides the basic information needed to get you started using your radar, video plotter.

The radar, video plotter, sounder and chart systems are operated with the control unit. Ten keys are labeled and they provide the function shown on their labels. The five soft keys provide various functions according to current operating mode. The ENTER knob mainly functions to register selections on the menu and adjust the EBL, VRM and gain. The

Trackball’s main function is to move the cursor across the screen. When you correctly execute an operation, the unit generates a beep. Invalid operation causes the unit to emit three beeps.

Selects a range.

Enter alphanumeric data.

Clears data; erases selected mark.

Opens/closes alarm menu.

Displays mode selection window.

Momentary press:

Registers own ship's position as a waypoint.

Press three seconds:

Marks man overboard position.

Shows or hides the soft keys, function keys, nav data alternately.

Soft keys

ABC

1

JKL

4

STU

7

_'#

0

GHI

3

PQR

6

EBL

VRM

Displays soft keys for EBL/VRM.

Opens/closes the main menu.

Long press:

Radar:

Displays soft keys for adjustment of gain, A/C SEA,

A/C RAIN.

Sounder:

Adjusts gain.

Turns power off.

Momentary press:

Turns power on, and shows D: RADAR STBY/TX soft key.

Trackball*

Shifts cursor EBL/VRM and cursor; selects menu items and options.

ENTER knob

Push:

Registers setting.

Rotate:

Adjusts gain, VRM, EBL, etc.; selects menu items and options. May also be used to enter alphanumeric data.

*:

When it has been some time since the trackball was last operated, the cursor may not track the

movement of the trackball. In this case, move the trackball rapidly and then finely.

How to remove the hard cover

Place your thumbs at the locations shown with circles in the illustration at right, and then lift the cover while pressing it with your thumbs.

1-1

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Soft keys

The function of the five soft keys (labeled A, B, C, D and E) changes according to the operation. Their labels for their current functions are shown on the screen to the left of the keys. To hide or show the soft keys, press the HIDE/SHOW key. Each press of the key shows preset soft keys, user function keys or turns off navigation information (at the top of the screen).

Some soft keys show the current setting of a soft key in reverse video as shown below.

3nm

12/

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

TRAIL

A

TRAIL

ON /

OFF

B

TRAIL

TIME

C

GRAD

SINGLE

D

TRAIL

COLOR

E

RETURN

34 ° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M

TRIP

NU

080 ° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm

16.0nm

A

MARK

ENTRY

B

MODE

NTH UP

C

NAV

POS

WP-002 FISH

BRIDGE

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Currently selected option shown in reverse video

Radar Display

Radar and plotter displays

Plotter Display

E

D. BOX

ON /

OFF

1-2

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.2 Inserting a Chart Card

Your unit reads SD cards, in the following formats: Navionics GOLD charts or C-MAP NT

+

/

NT MAX charts, depending on the type of processor unit you have. Insert the appropriate chart card for your area as follows:

1. Open the chart drive.

Chart drive

Processor unit

2. Insert desired chart label side up, before turning on the power.

3. Close the lid.

To remove chart card, follow the steps shown below.

1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.

2. Press the SHOW/HIDE key.

3. Open the chart drive lid, and then push the card once and then pull it out.

Note 1: Do not remove a card while the chart is being drawn. This may cause the equipment to freeze.

Note 2: Do not insert or remove a card while the power is on. This may cause the equipment to freeze.

Note 3: For multiple processor units, do not use the same chart card type in more than one processor unit.

Note 4: Remove the card with care; rough handling can damage the card and destroy its contents.

1-3

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off

Press the POWER/TX key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and then the equipment shows the startup NavNet screen (about 20 seconds), the product information screen, startup test results and chart usage disclaimer. During this period the equipment is inoperative. The startup test checks the ROM, RAM, internal battery and backup data for proper operation, displaying the results for each as OK or NG (No Good). If NG appears an appropriate message appears on the screen. For any NG, try to press any key to go to the chart disclaimer screen, then perform the diagnostic test as shown in the paragraph “8.8

Diagnostics.”

For start up with the radar display, the magnetron takes from one and thirty seconds minute to three minutes (depending on radar model) to warm up before the radar can be operated. The time remaining for warming up of the magnetron is counted down at the center of the display.

You may press any key at the chart disclaimer screen to show the last-used display, or wait several seconds to let the equipment do it for you.

To turn the unit off, press and hold down the POWER/TX key until the screen goes off

(approx. 3 sec.). Note that the network sounder will be turned off approx. three minutes after turning off the power. This is due to the equipment’s electrical characteristics.

Note: The first time you turn on the power (or any time the power is applied after a memory reset), you are asked if you want to start the simulation mode, which provides simulated operation of the equipment after the installation mode selection. Push the ENTER knob to start the simulation mode, or press the CLEAR key to start normal operation. For further details about the simulation mode, see the paragraph “1.10 Simulation Display.”

1-4

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.4 Adjusting Hue, Panel Illumination

You may choose the colors for the radar plotter, and overlay displays, and adjust panel brilliance. and hue appear.

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

BRILL

CONTST

34

080

BRILL

CONTST

16.0nm

B

PANEL

BRILL

B

PANEL

BRILL

C

HUE

C

HUE

D

RADAR

STBY

D

RADAR

STBY

WP-002

FISH

E

+

RETURN

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

(Blank label of softkey is not used)

Radar Display

Brilliance adjustment soft keys

2. Press the C: HUE soft key to show the hue setting window.

BRIDGE

E

RETURN

(Blank label of softkey is not used)

Plotter Display

HUE

▲

{

{

DAY

NIGHT

{

~

▼

TWILIGHT

MANUAL SET

Hue window

follows the color settings on the CHART DETAILS menu for the plotter and the RADAR

DISPLAY SETUP menu for the radar.

Characters Red Black Green

Radar ring

Radar echo

Red

Orange

Green

Multi

Green

Yellow

Background Black White Blue

Landmass (plotter) Orange* Light-orange* Orange*

* = Beige and light-beige on C-MAP display unit.

Note: When using the overlay screen, the own ship track will be hidden if the radar background and own ship track are blue and the “MANUAL SET” hue setting is used. In this case, set HUE to other position and then return to “MANUAL” to show the own ship track in black.

1-5

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

4. Press the B: PANEL BRILL soft key to show the panel brilliance window. The bar graph shows current panel brilliance setting.

PANEL BRILLIANCE

8

Panel brilliance setting window

6. Hit the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

1.5 Selecting a Display

If you have a radar, navigator, network sounder and external video source (video recorder, etc., optional PIP board required) six full-screen displays are available: radar, plotter, echo sounder, nav data, overlay, and external video. In addition to the full-screen display, you can divide the screen into halves and thirds to show two and three sets of images on a combination display.

Full screen Combination screen Overlay screen

(radar) (radar + plotter) (plotter + radar only,

Requires L/L data)

Display screens

The table below shows the displays available with each screen type.

Screen type and available display screen

Full screen

Plotter, radar, sounder, nav data, external video, overlay

Combination screen options

(half- or thirds-screen)

Plotter, radar, sounder, compass (or wind), highway, compass (or wind)/highway, nav data, overlay, external video

Overlay screen options

Radar + plotter

1-6

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.5.2 Selecting a display

1. Press the DISP key to show the display screen selection window. The icons of modes not available are shaded. HOTPAGE 1-HOTPAGE 6 are user-arrangeable displays called “hot pages,” which you can configure as you like. For further details, see the paragraph “7.6 Hot Page Setup.”

Selected item

RADAR PLOTTER SOUNDER NAV DATA OVERLAY EXT VIDEO WX FAX

Basic display screens

Hot pages

HOTPAGE 1 HOTPAGE 2 HOTPAGE 3 HOTPAGE 4 HOTPAGE 5 HOTPAGE 6

·

TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE

AND PUSH KNOB TO ENTER.

·

PUSH ANY SOFT KEY TO

SELECT IMAGE SOURCE.

Display screen selection window

Note: “WX FAX” is available only when the facsimile receiver FAX-30 is connected. If the message “AUX SOURCE IS DISCONNECTED. PUSH ENT KNOB TO EXIT.” appears, press the ENTER knob and select other item.

2. Rotate the ENTER knob to select a basic display screen or a hot page screen.

3. Push the ENTER knob.

4. If you select a basic display screen, a group of appropriate combination displays appear.

In the example below, the radar combination screens are shown. When WX FAX is selected at step 2, a combination display does not appear.

PUSH ENTER KNOB.

Radar combination screen selection window

5. Rotate the ENTER knob to select display desired.

6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.

RETURN

1-7

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.5.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens

A soft key is provided in relevant combination and overlay screens to switch control between displays. In the example below, the E: PLOTTR CNTRL and E: SNDR CNTRL soft keys enable switching control between the plotter and sounder screens in the plotter/sounder combination display.

34

° 22. 3456’N 359.9°M TRIP NU

080

° 22. 3456’E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm

16.0nm

0’33"

40.0

0

50

100

A

MARK

ENTRY

B

MODE

NTH UP

C

NAV

POS

150

E

CNTRL

PLOTTR

97

LF

WP-002 FISH

Plotter display selected

200

E

CNTRL

PLOTTR

To adjust sounder

E

CNTRL

SNDR

To adjust plotter

34

° 22. 3456’N 359.9°M TRIP NU

080

° 22. 3456’E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm

16.0nm

0’33"

40.0

0

A

SHIFT

50

B

MODE

100

C

FREQ

LF /

HF

D

DISPLAY

MODE

150

97

LF

WP-002

FISH

Sounder display selected

200

E

CNTRL

SNDR

How to switch control between modes in the plotter/sounder combination display

1-8

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.5.4 Selecting image source

When more than one network radar or network sounder is connected to the equipment, you may select an image source for each as shown below. This is not necessary when only one network radar or network sounder is connected.

1. Press the DISP key.

2. Press any soft key to show the following display.

RADAR SOURCE 1 (HOST NAME: NAVNET-1)

SOUNDER SOURCE ETR1 (HOST NAME: SOUNDER)

AUX SOURCE

IP ADDRESS

AUX 1 (HOST NAME: WXFAX)

172.031.003.003

DEVICE NUMBER 1 (HOST NAME: NAVNET-1)

SELECT

SOURCE

EDIT

IF THERE IS MORE THAN

ONE NETWORK RADAR OR

ECHO SOUNDER, YOU MAY

SELECT THE IMAGE

SOURCES FOR DISPLAY.

RETURN

Select source menu

3. Use the Trackball to select RADAR SOURCE, SOUNDER SOURCE or AUX SOURCE as appropriate, then press the A: EDIT key.

RADAR SOURCE

SOUNDER SOURCE

▲

~

{

{

{

▼

1 (NAVNET1)

2 (NAVNET2)

3 (NAVNET3)

4 (NAVNET4)

▲

~

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

▼

ETR0 (SOUNDER)

ETR1 (SOUNDER1)

ETR2 (SOUNDER2)

ETR3 (SOUNDER3)

ETR4 (SOUNDER4)

ETR5 (SOUNDER5)

Radar source

ETR8 (SOUNDER8)

ETR9 (SOUNDER9)

Sounder source

AUX SOURCE

▲

~

{

{

{

▼

AUX1 (WXFAX)

AUX2 (WXFAX1)

AUX3 (WXFAX2)

AUX4 (WXFAX3)

Aux source

Radar source and sounder source windows

4. Use the Trackball choose source name:

5. Push the ENTER knob to set.

6. Press the DISP key to finish.

7. Turn the power off and on again.

1-9

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

The Trackball functions to shift the cursor, for measurement of range and bearing to a location (radar) and latitude and longitude position (plotter). Roll the Trackball to shift the cursor. The cursor moves in the direction of Trackball rotation.

Cursor

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

A

SIGNAL

PROC.

B

RADAR

DISPLY

C

NAV

FUNC

D

TARGET

E

ZOOM &

D. BOX

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Cursor Data

Bearing from own ship to cursor

Range from own ship to cursor

Radar Display

Cursor data

L/L position,

Range and bearing from own ship to cursor

+

34 ° 22. 3456'N 272.4°M

TRIP

NU

080 ° 22. 3456'E 15.9 nm 99.9 nm

16.0nm

A

MARK

ENTRY

B

MODE

NTH UP

C

CENTER

Cursor

D

GO TO

CURSOR

WP-002

FISH

BRIDGE

E

D. BOX

ON /

OFF

Plotter Display

Cursor, cursor data

1-10

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.7 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as

Destination

The MOB mark functions to mark man overboard position. You can inscribe the mark from any mode except nav data, when playing back data or conducting any test. Note that this function requires position data.

Note: The function of the SAVE/MOB key depends on the setting of SAVE

MOB KEY FUNCTION in the GENERAL

SETUP menu. The description below shows the procedure using the default setting. For further details, see Save

MOB Key Function on page 7-2.

Range, bearing

Man overboard

Current position

MOB mark

M

(MOB)

O

B

162.5

°

M

0.49 nm

MOB Data Box

Bearing and range to MOB position

MOB concept

1. Press and hold down the SAVE/MOB key for about three seconds when someone falls overboard. The display shows the waypoint number being saved (youngest empty waypoint number, 001-999) followed by the MOB confirmation window.

Time remaining is counted down while pressing the SAVE/MOB key.

WAYPOINT SAVED!

XXXWPT

CONTINUE PUSHING

FOR MOB!

XXX = Waypoint number

CONTINUE PUSHING

FOR MOB!

XX SEC

MAN OVER BOARD!

GO TO MOB?

YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB

NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY

XX = Time remaining is counted down.

MOB mark messages

2. Push the ENTER knob to select the MOB position as the destination, or press the

CLEAR key to only mark current ship’s position as a waypoint. If you select the MOB position as destination;

•

A full-screen radar, plotter or overlay appears depending on the display in use. (If the

MOB key function is “MOB Without Confirmation” the range is automatically set to

0.5 nm.) Further, the waypoint marker appears on the radar display.

•

The MOB mark “MOB” appears at the MOB position and a blue line runs between it and current position. This line shows the shortest course to the MOB position.

•

Range and bearing to the MOB position are shown in the MOB data box.

To erase an MOB mark from the plotter display, you must first erase its corresponding waypoint. Place the cursor on the MOB mark, then press the CLEAR key followed by pushing the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint. Then, repeat to erase the MOB mark.

1-11

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Data boxes, providing navigation data, may be shown on any full-screen display. Up to six data boxes (two in case of large characters) may be shown, and the default data boxes are position (in latitude and longitude), course over ground, speed over ground and trip log. The user may choose which data to display, where to locate it, and show or hide it as desired. In addition, data boxes may be set independently for each display mode (plotter, radar, sounder). For how to select data for the data boxes, see the paragraph “7.5 Data Boxes

Setup.”

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

A

SIGNAL

PROC.

B

RADAR

DISPLY

C

NAV

FUNC

D

TARGET

34 ° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M

TRIP

NU

080 ° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm

16.0nm

A

MARK

ENTRY

B

MODE

NTH UP

C

NAV

POS

Data boxes

TRIP LOG

177 nm

47 °58.535'N

122 °36.496'W

COG

323.6

°

M

SOG

20.0

kt

Radar Display

E

ZOOM &

D. BOX

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Data boxes

WP-002

FISH

TRIP LOG

177 nm

47 °58.535'N

122 °36.496'W

COG

323.6

°

M

SOG

20.0

kt

Plotter Display

Data boxes

E

D. BOX

ON

/ OFF

1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key

Plotter: E: D. BOX ON/OFF

Radar: E: ZOOM & D. BOX

→ D: D. BOX ON/OFF (EBL/VRM data box, cursor data box also shown/hidden)

Sounder: B: AUTO/D. BOX

→A: D. BOX ON/OFF

You may select the location for data boxes as follows:

1. Using the Trackball, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand”. Push the ENTER knob, and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.

2. Use the Trackball to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER knob.

1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a data box

If a data box is obscuring a desired object, you may temporarily erase the box. Use the

Trackball to place the cursor inside the data box you wish to erase, then press the CLEAR key. To redisplay the box, press the D. BOX soft key twice to display it.

1-12

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

The function keys provide for one-touch execution of a desired function. The default function key settings are as shown in the table below.

Function

Key

Default Setting, Key Label

#1

#2

#3

Heading line on/off, HL Track on/off, TRK

Rings on/off, RNG

Echo trail, TRL

Edit mark/line, EML

Ruler, RUL

TLL output, TLL

Clutter, CLT

Signal level, SLV

Noise limiter, NL

ADD

#5 STBY/TX,

Waypoint alphanumeric list, ALP

Executing a function

Picture advance, PA

1. Press the HIDE/SHOW key to replace the preset soft key labels with the function key labels.

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

A

H

L

B

C

D

T

R

L

R

N

G

S

F

T

E

T

X

Function keys

34

° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M

TRIP

NU

080 ° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9nm

16.0 nm

002WP

FISH

BRIDGE

A

B

C

D

E

A

D

D

R

U

L

A

L

P

E

M

L

T

R

K

Function keys

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Plotter Display

Radar Display

Function keys

2. Press function key desired.

Note: Function keys can be individually programmed for the plotter, radar and sounder displays. For further details see the following:

Radar: paragraph 7.2.3

Plotter: paragraph 7.3.2

Sounder: paragraph 7.9.4

1-13

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.10 Simulation Display

The simulation display, for use by service technicians for demonstration purposes, provides simulated operation to help acquaint you with the many features your unit has to offer. It allows you to view and control a simulated plotter, radar and sounder picture, without position-fixing equipment, network radar or a network sounder. Most controls are operative, thus you may practice setting destination, enter waypoints, measure range and bearing to a target, etc. Three simulation displays are provided for both the radar and echo sounder.

The simulation icon (SIM) appears when any simulation mode is active.

To start the simulation display;

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP and D: SIMULATION

SETUP soft keys in that order.

RADAR

PLOTTER

SOUNDER

SPEED

COURSE

LATITUDE

LONGITUDE

START DATE & TIME

GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA

LIVE

LIVE

LIVE

00.0kt

000.0

°

45

°

35.000'N

125

°

00.000'W

00:00 24.NOV.01

NO

SIM

SETUP

A

EDIT

E

RETURN

Simulation setup menu

3. Follow appropriate procedure on the next several pages. To stop the simulation mode and return to normal operation, choose LIVE for radar, sounder or plotter.

Radar

NavNet processor unit-generated echoes or user data

1. Select RADAR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

RADAR

▲

¡

¡

¡

¤

▼

BUILT IN DATA 1

BUILT IN DATA 2

USER DATA

LIVE

2. Select BUILT IN DATA 1 or 2 for internally generated echoes or USER DATA for user-saved radar data. Push the ENTER knob.

3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

1-14

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

NavNet radar antenna-generated echoes (not available with the GD-1920C-BB)

1. Select GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

2. Select YES, then push the ENTER knob to erase simulation data and get new data. The message “Now getting demo data. Do not turn off processor unit.” appears while the unit is receiving radar data.

Note: If the network radar could not be found “Radar source is not found. Cannot get demo data.” appears. And if the radar is not active, the message “Radar is not active.

Cannot get demo data.” is displayed. Check that the radar is plugged in and its signal cable is firmly fastened.

3. Select RADAR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Select SIMULATION 2, then push the ENTER knob.

5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Plotter

1. Select PLOTTER, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

2. Select SIMULATION, then push the ENTER knob.

3. Select SPEED, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Enter speed (setting range, 0-99 kt, default speed, 0 kt) with the alphanumeric keys, then push the ENTER knob.

5. Select COURSE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

6. Select “8 FIGURE” to trace the simulated ship’s track in a

PLOTTER

▲

¡

¤

▼

SIMULATION

LIVE figure-eight course, or enter your own course at DIRECTION. To enter course, use the

Trackball to select digit, and enter value with the alphanumeric keys.

7. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

8. Select LATITUDE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

9. Enter latitude (setting range, 85

°

N-85

°

S, default setting, 45

°

35.000’N), then push the

ENTER knob.

10. Select LONGITUDE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

11. Enter longitude (setting range, 180

°

E-180

°

W, default setting, 125

°

00.000’W), then push the ENTER knob.

12. Select START DATE & TIME, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

13. Enter start date and time, then push the ENTER knob.

14. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Sounder

1. Select SOUNDER, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

2. Select BUILT IN DATA (internally generated echoes) or

ETR (network sounder-generated echoes), then push the

ENTER knob.

Note: The depth, shift, bottom-zoom, bottom-lock and bottom discrimination cannot be shown in the BUILT IN

DATA mode.

3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

SOUNDER

▲

¡

¡

¤

▼

BUILT IN DATA

ETR DATA

LIVE

1-15

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

This page intentionally left blank.

1-16

This chapter covers radar operation, including the ARP (Auto Plotter) function. ARP requires a Model 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB series network radar equipped with the ARP circuit board.

North marker

(Head-up, Course-up mode)

Guard zone 2

Cursor

Range/ range ring interval

Presentation mode

Alarm icon

EBL1

Battery icon

Simulation mode

Guard zone 1

Range ring

Pulselength

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

S

M

Heading line

319. 9

°

M

Heading

M: Magnetic

T: True

TRAIL 30m

02m30s

G1 IN

G2 OUT

ES H

EAV L

IR L

VRM1

Zoom area

EBL1 bearing

VRM1 range

EBL1

27.0

°

R

VRM1

5.666nm

EBL2

327.1

°

R

VRM2

8.212nm

EBL2 bearing, VRM2 range

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Trail time

Trail elapsed time

Guard zone 1

Guard zone 2

Echo stretch

Echo averaging

Interference rejector

VRM2

EBL2

Own ship vector

(ARP-equipped model, true vector mode)

Zoom window

Cursor range and bearing

(Cursor position may also be shown, in

L/L or Loran C TD.)

Radar display

1. Confirm that the network radar is plugged in.

2. Press the DISP key to select a radar display.

3. Press the POWER/TX key momentarily.

4. Press the D: RADAR STBY soft key to highlight TX on its label.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key.

When the radar picture is not required, but you want keep it in a state of readiness, press the D: RADAR TX soft key to highlight STBY on its label.

2-1

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.3 Tuning

The radar receiver can be tuned automatically or manually, and the default tuning method is automatic. If you require manual tuning, do the following:

1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.

2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.

3. Select TUNING, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

TUNING

AUTO

MAN

Tuning bar

Tuning window

4. Choose MAN.

5. Adjust the ENTER knob until the tuning bar is at its longest position.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Note: If the auto setting does not provide satisfactory tuning, ask your dealer how to re-adjust tuning.

The GAIN key adjusts the gain sensitivity of the radar receiver. It works in a manner similar to that of volume control of a broadcast receiver, which amplifies received signals.

The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If your gain setting is too low, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand, excessive gain yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the display.

To adjust the receiver sensitivity, transmit on long range, and then do the following:

1. Press the GAIN key to show the “gain adjustment” soft keys, and the last-used adjustment window appears. The example below shows the gain

GAIN SENSITIVITY sensitivity adjustment window. The gain soft keys shown depend on radar source as shown below.

AUTO ROUGH

AUTO MODERATE

AUTO CALM

MAN

0

2. If the gain sensitivity window is not displayed, press the A: GAIN soft key to show the gain sensitivity setting window.

3. Use the Trackball to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO

Gain sensitivity window

MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN (manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.

4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust, while observing the radar echo. The range of adjustment is 0-100.

5. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

2-2

2. RADAR OPERATION

Adjusting the FTC (When the radar source is the 17x4 series radar)

To suppress rain clutter from heavy storms or scattered rain clutter, adjust the FTC.

In addition to reducing clutter, the FTC can be used in fine weather to clarify the picture when navigating in confined waters. However, with the circuit active the receiver is less sensitive. Therefore, turn off the FTC, by setting it for “0”, when its function is not required.

1. Press the GAIN key.

2. Press the D: FTC soft key to show the FTC window.

3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is 0-100(%). Do not overadjust the FTC – weak target echoes may be missed.

4. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or E: RETURN soft key to finish.

2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter

2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works

Echoes from waves can be troublesome, covering the central part of the display with random signals known as “sea clutter”. The higher the waves and the higher the antenna above the water, the further the clutter will extend. Sea clutter may affect radar performance because real targets are sometimes hidden by the echoes of small waves. (See the left-hand figure in the figure below.) When sea clutter masks the picture, adjust the A/C

SEA to reduce the clutter.

The A/C SEA reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter is the greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases, so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter.

Sea clutter at screen center

A/C SEA adjusted; sea clutter suppressed

Effect of A/C SEA

2-3

2. RADAR OPERATION

A/C SEA should be adjusted so that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and small targets become distinguishable.

1. Press the GAIN key.

2. Press the B: A/C SEA soft key to show the A/C SEA setting window.

A/C SEA

¡

AUTO ROUGH

¡

AUTO MODERATE

¡

AUTO CALM

¤

MAN

0

A/C SEA setting window

3. Use the Trackball to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN

(manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.

4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is

0-100. Do not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.

5. When the radar source is the Model 18x4 or 19x4, A/C SEA and A/C RAIN can be automatically adjusted, with the A/C AUTO ON/OFF soft key. Press the key to highlight

ON or OFF as appropriate. Note that the A/C AUTO adjustment is done at the MANU in the A/C SEA window.

6. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or E: RETURN soft key to finish.

2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter

The vertical beamwidth of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect precipitation clutter (rain, snow, hail, etc.) in the same manner as normal targets. Precipitation clutter shows as random dots on the screen.

When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier.

1. Press the GAIN key.

2. Press the C: A/C RAIN soft key to show the A/C RAIN window.

A/C RAIN

0

A/C RAIN setting window

3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust the A/C RAIN. The current level is shown on the A/C

RAIN level bar in the A/C RAIN window, and the range of adjustment is 0 to 100(%). Do not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.

4. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or E: RETURN soft key to finish.

2-4

2. RADAR OPERATION

The range setting determines the size of the area (in nautical miles) that will appear on your display. In addition, the range setting will also automatically adjust the range ring interval so that accurate range measurements may be made while operating on any range setting.

The range, range ring interval and pulselength appear at the top left-hand corner of the display.

Press the [RANGE (+ or -)] key to change the range scale.

Range scales (nm, sm)

Range 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72

Ring

Interval

0.0625 0.125 0.125

0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18

No. of

Rings

2 2 5 4 5 4 5 4

Range scales (km)

Range 0.25 0.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72

0.25 0.25

Rings 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 5

Note 1: Maximum range depends on the network radar as shown below.

Model 1824C-BB: 24 nm

Model 1834C-BB: 36 nm

Model 1934C-BB: 48 nm

Model 1944C-BB: 64 nm

Model 1954C-BB, 1964C-BB: 72 nm

Note 2: You may choose which ranges to use from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu. For details see paragraph 7.2.2. This function is not available with the GD-1920C-BB.

2.8 Pulselength

The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left corner of the display. Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales. Therefore, you are not usually required to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength setting, however, it is possible to change it for the ranges shown below. Generally, select a longer pulse for longer detection range and shorter pulse for better range discrimination.

1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km: Short pulse, medium pulse

3 nm, 3 sm, 6 km: Medium pulse, long pulse

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.

2-5

2. RADAR OPERATION

3nm

12/

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

SIGNAL

PROCESS

A

I. REJ

OFF

B

E. AVG

OFF

C

PULSE

E

LONG

D

E. STR

OFF

E

RETURN

Shown when radar source is the Model

18x4-BB/19x4-BB series radar. Not shown otherwise.

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Signal process soft keys

3. Choose the 1.5 nm or 3 nm with the RANGE key.

4. Press the C: PULSE soft key to select the pulselength setting. SHORT or MEDIUM for

1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km and MEDIUM or LONG for 3 nm, 3 sm,

6 km.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

This unit provides four radar presentation modes: head-up, course-up, north-up and true motion.

Heading data is required for modes other than head-up.

2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key to show the RADAR DISPLAY soft keys.

3. Press the A: MODE soft key. Each pressing of the key changes the presentation mode and the presentation mode indication in the sequence of North-up, True Motion,

Head-up, and Course-up.

Function Indicator on display

North-up N-UP

True Motion TR-M

Head-up H-UP

Course-up C-UP

Soft key label

TRUE M

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish

Note: When heading data is lost, the presentation mode automatically goes to head-up, the heading indication at the screen top shows “- - -.-

°” and the audio alarm sounds. Press the

ALARM key to acknowledge the alarm. The message “HEADING DATA MISSING” appears.

Restore compass signal to show heading indication. Use the A: MODE soft key to select presentation mode if necessary. The audio alarm may be silenced with the CLEAR key.

2-6

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.9.2 Description of presentation modes

Head-up

A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line connecting the center with the top of the display indicates own ship’s heading. Targets are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to own ship’s heading.

The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker.

Course-up

The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the currently selected course at the top of the screen. As you change heading, the ship’s heading line moves. If you select a new course, the picture resets to display the new course at the top of the display.

Targets are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to the intended course which is maintained at the 0-degree position. The heading line moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course changes.

North-up

In the north-up mode, targets are painted at their measured distances and in their true (compass) directions from own ship. North is maintained at the top of the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to ship’s heading.

True motion

Fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the screen, while your own ship moves across the radar image at the correct speed and heading. A map-like image is displayed, with all moving vessels traveling in true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses.

As your ship’s position approaches the edge of the screen, the radar display is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of your ship. You can manually reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing the

B: RADAR DISPLY soft key followed by the B: SHIFT soft key.

North Marker

North

 Marker

Head-up display

Course-up display

North

North

Heading Line

Heading

 Line

Heading Line

North-up display

Heading Line

True motion display

2-7

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.10 Measuring the Range

You can measure the range to a radar target three ways: by the range rings, by the cursor, and by the VRM (Variable Range Marker).

2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings

Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest ring.

To turn the range rings on, do the following:

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key.

3. Press the C: RINGS soft key to turn the rings on and select desired brilliance.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor

Operate the Trackball to place the cursor intersection on the inside edge of the radar target.

The range to the target, as well as the bearing, appears to the right of “+” at the bottom of the display.

Cursor

3nm

12/

H-UP

Target

319. 9

°

M

A

SIGNAL

PROC.

B

RADAR

DISPLY

C

NAV

FUNC

D

TARGET

E

ZOOM &

D. BOX

+

11.2 ˚R

11.70

nm

Range and bearing from own ship to cursor

How to measure range to a target with the cursor

2-8

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM

1. Press the EBL/VRM key to display the EBL/VRM soft keys.

2. Press the B: VRM1 ON (dotted ring VRM) or E: VRM2 ON (dashed ring VRM) soft key to select the desired VRM. The selected VRM’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is highlighted.

3. Rotate the ENTER knob then place the VRM on the inside edge of a radar target. Read the VRM indication to find range to the target.

3nm

12/

H-UP

VRM2

(Dashed line)

VRM1

(Dotted line)

319. 9

°

M

EBL

VRM

A

EBL1

ON

B

VRM1

ON

C

OFFSET

D

EBL2

ON

E

VRM2

ON

VRM1 range

EBL1

---.-

°

R

VRM1

3.123nm

EBL2

---.-

°

R

VRM2

9.343nm

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Active VRM is highlighted.

VRM2 range

How to measure range with the VRM

4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.

2.10.4 Various VRM operations

Erasing a VRM, VRM indication: Press appropriate VRM soft key (B or E key), then press the CLEAR key. The VRM is erased and its indication becomes blank.

Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the EBL or VRM soft key (B or E key) associated with the EBL/VRM data box you wish to erase. Press the CLEAR key once or twice to erase the data box.

Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the E: ZOOM & D. BOX and D: D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys to show or hide the EBL/VRM data boxes.

Moving EBL/VRM data boxes: When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target you want to see, you can move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done when the EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.

1. Press the EBL/VRM key to turn off the EBL/VRM soft keys.

2. Using the Trackball, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the ENTER knob, and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.

3. Use the Trackball to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER knob.

2-9

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.11 Measuring the Bearing

There are two ways to measure the bearing to a target: by the cursor, and by the EBL

(Electronic bearing Line).

2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor

Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the center of the target. The bearing to the target appears in the range and bearing box at the bottom right-hand corner on the screen.

2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL

1. Press the EBL/VRM key.

2. Press the A: EBL1 ON (dotted line EBL) or D: EBL2 ON (dashed line EBL) soft key to select the desired EBL. The selected EBL’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is highlighted.

3. Rotate the ENTER knob to bisect the radar target with the EBL. Read the EBL indication to find the bearing to the target.

EBL1

(Dotted line)

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

EBL

VRM

A

EBL1

ON

B

VRM1

ON

C

OFFSET

EBL2

(Dashed line)

EBL2 bearing

EBL1 bearing

EBL1

330.1

°

R

VRM1

-.---nm

EBL2

234.1˚R

VRM2

-.---nm

D

EBL2

ON

E

VRM2

ON

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Active marker is highlighted.

How to measure bearing with the EBL

4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.

Note: The bearing to a target may be shown relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or

True bearing (requires heading data). This may be done with “EBL REFERENCE,” which is in the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu.

2.11.3 Various EBL operations

Erasing an EBL, EBL indication: Press appropriate EBL soft key (B or E key), then press the CLEAR key. The EBL is erased and its indication becomes blank.

Erasing, hiding, moving EBL/VRM data boxes: See paragraph 2.10.4.

2-10

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker

The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. It is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up mode; it changes its orientation in the north-up, course-up and true motion modes with ship’s movement.

The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up and course-up modes the north marker moves around the bearing scale as the ship’s heading moves.

To temporarily erase the heading line and north marker, press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key followed by the D: HL OFF soft key. Release the key to redisplay the markers. (If the radar soft keys are not shown, hit the CLEAR key to display them.)

2.13 Reducing Noise Interference

Noise, appearing on the displays as random “speckles,” can be reduced as follows:

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.

3. Select NOISE REJECTION, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Select OFF, LOW or HIGH as appropriate.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference

Radar interference may occur when near another shipborne radar that is operating in the same frequency band as your radar. Its on-screen appearance looks like many bright dots either scattered at random or in the form of dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the display. Interference effects are distinguishable from normal echoes because they do not appear in the same place on successive rotations of the scanner.

Be sure to turn off the interference rejector when no interference exists – weak targets may be missed.

Radar interference

2-11

2. RADAR OPERATION

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.

3nm

12/

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

SIGNAL

PROCESS

A

I. REJ

OFF

B

E. AVG

OFF

C

PULSE

E

LONG

D

E. STR

OFF

E

RETURN

Shown when radar source is the Model

18x4-BB/19x4-BB series radar. Not shown otherwise.

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

SIGNAL PROCESS soft keys

3. Press the A: I. REJ soft key successively to choose the interference rejection level desired; LOW, MED, HIGH or OFF.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

The display shows IR L (Low), IR M (Medium) or IR H (High) when the interference rejector is on.

2.15 Zoom

The zoom feature allows you to double the size of the area selected with the “zoom square.” It is available on any range but is inoperative in true motion and when the display is shifted.

2.15.1 Zooming radar targets

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Use the Trackball to set the cursor where you want to zoom.

3. Press the E: ZOOM & D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.

4. Press the A: ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ON. A hollow square, called the “zoom area,” appears on the display.

5. To release the cursor, press the B: CURSOR FLOAT soft key. (The hollow square changes to a dashed one.) To relocate the zoom circle, select location with the

Trackball, then press the B: CURSOR LOCK key.

6. To quit the zoom function, press the A: ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select OFF.

2-12

2. RADAR OPERATION

Zoom area

12/

HU

3nm

LP

Zoom window

319. 9

°

M

ZOOM &

D. BOX

A

ZOOM

ON

/ OFF

B

CURSOR

FLOAT

C

ARP

TGT ZM

D

D. BOX

ON /

OFF

E

RETURN

Requires optional

ARP Board in

Model 18x40-BB/19x4-BB series network radar.

Not shown otherwise.

+

359.9 ˚R

5.727

nm

Zoom

2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets

You may zoom in on TTM (Tracked Target Message) and ARP targets. TTM targets can come from a NavNet connected radar, or from other ARP radar that is outputting the TTM message. (TTM is a NMEA 0183 data sentence that is an available output from some ARP capable radar.) Target numbers must be turned on to use this function. This can be done by enabling the target ID number option in the ARP SETUP menu. This function is available when TARGET ID NUMBER is ON.

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the E: ZOOM/D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.

3. Press the A: ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ZOOM ON.

4. Press the C: ARP TGT ZM soft key.

SELECT TARGET NO.

▲

1

▼

Target no. selection window

5. Use the ENTER knob to select number (1-10), then push the ENTER knob. If the target number does not exist several beeps sound and the zoom function is cancelled.

.

To cancel, press the B: CURSOR LOCK soft key.

Note: The zoom window blends in with the background when the background color for the radar picture is white. If the window is difficult to see, change the background color.

2-13

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.16 Shifting the Picture

Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced manually or automatically to expand the view field without switching to a larger scale. Zoom is not available when the display is shifted.

SHIFT

2.16.1 Manual shift

Cursor

The sweep origin can be shifted in any presentation mode to a point specified by the cursor by up to 50% of the

Place cursor where desired.

Press the A: MANUAL

soft key.

range in use in any direction.

Manual shift

1. Locate the cursor anywhere within the effective radius of the display.

2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

3. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key.

4. Press the B: SHIFT soft key.

5. Press the A: MANUAL soft key to shift. The heading line shifts to the cursor location.

SHIFT appears at right-hand corner of the display.

To cancel shift, press the B: RADAR DISPLY, B: SHIFT and D: OFF soft keys.

2.16.2 Automatic shift

The amount of automatic shift is calculated according to ship’s speed, and the amount of shift is limited to 50% of the range in use. For example, if you set the shift speed setting for

15 knots and the ship is running at 10 knots the amount of shift will be about 34%. The formula for determining shift amount is as shown below. Automatic shift mode is only available in the head-up mode.

Shift speed setting

Setting automatic shift maximum speed

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key.

3. Press the B: SHIFT soft key to show the shift soft keys.

4. Press the C: AUTO S.SPD soft key to display the auto

AUTO SHIP SPEED

15 ship speed setting window.

5. Adjust the Trackball or ENTER knob to set the maximum speed of your vessel, and then push the

ENTER knob or the C: ENTER soft key to set. The setting range is 1-99 kt and the default setting is 15 kt.

Automatic shift

Press the B: AUTO soft key to automatically shift the sweep origin. To cancel shift, press the B: RADAR DISPLY, B: SHIFT and D: OFF soft keys.

2-14

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.17 Using the Offset EBL

The offset EBL can be used to predict a potential collision course. It can also be used to measure the range and bearing between two targets.

2.17.1 Predicting collision course

The procedure below may be used to check if a radar target is on a potential collision course with your vessel.

1. Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.

2. Press the A: EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.

3. Press the C: OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which is marked with an “X.”

4. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the radar target which looks like it might be on a collision course with own ship.

5. Push the ENTER knob to fix the origin position.

6. After waiting for a few minutes (at least three minutes), rotate the ENTER knob so the

EBL bisects the target at the new position. If the target tracks along the EBL towards the center of the display (your ship’s position), the target may be on a collision course with your vessel.

To cancel the offset EBL, press the C: OFFSET soft key.

Target tracked here

Initial target position

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

EBL

VRM

A

EBL1

ON

B

VRM1

ON

C

OFFSET

D

EBL2

ON

E

VRM2

ON

EBL1

45.0˚R

VRM1

-.---nm

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Predicting collision course with the offset EBL

2-15

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets

The procedure which follows shows how to measure the range and bearing between two targets, using the targets “A” and “B” in the figure below as an example.

1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the target “A.”

2. Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.

3. Press the A: EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.

4. Press the C: OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which is marked with an “X.”

5. Rotate the ENTER knob so the EBL bisects the target “B.”

6. Push the ENTER knob, then press the B: VRM1 ON soft key.

7. Rotate the ENTER knob to place the VRM1 on the inner edge of the target “B.”

8. Look at the indications for VRM1 and EBL1 to find the range and bearing between the two targets.

To cancel the offset EBL, press the C: OFFSET soft key.

Target B

Target A

3nm

12/

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

EBL

VRM

A

EBL1

ON

B

VRM1

ON

C

OFFSET

D

EBL2

ON

E

VRM2

ON

Bearing and range between target A and target B

EBL1

45.0

°

R

VRM1

7.121nm

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Measuring range and bearing between two targets

2-16

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.18 Echo Trails

Echo trails are simulated afterglow of target echoes that represent their movements relative or true to own ship. This function is useful for alerting you past possible collision situations.

Echo trail

Sample echo trails

2.18.1 Trail time

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the D: TARGET soft key.

3. Press the A: TRAIL soft key to show the trail soft keys.

3nm

12/

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

TRAIL

A

TRAIL

ON

/ OFF

B

TRAIL

TIME

C

GRAD

SINGLE

D

TRAIL

COLOR

E

RETURN

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Trail soft keys

4. Press the B: TRAIL TIME soft key to show the trail time window.

TRAIL TIME

▲

▼

15 seconds

30 seconds

1 minute

3 minutes

6 minutes

15 minutes

30 minutes

CONTINUOUS

Trail time window

5. Use the Trackball to select time desired.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

7. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice to finish.

2-17

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.18.2 Starting echo trails

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the D: TARGET soft key.

3. Press the A: TRAIL soft key.

4. Press the A: TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select ON.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice to finish.

“TRAIL,” the echo trail time selected and elapsed time appear at the top right-hand corner of the display. Then, afterglow starts extending from all targets. Trails are restarted when the range or mode is changed and zoom or shift is turned on.

For continuous trails, the maximum continuous trail time is 99 minutes and 59 seconds.

When the elapsed time clock counts up to that time, the elapsed time display resets to zero and trails begin again.

To turn off echo trail, press the A: TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select OFF at step 4 in the above procedure.

Trails are restarted when the range or mode is changed and zoom or shift is activated.

2.18.3 Trail gradation

The echo trails can be shown in single or multiple gradations. Multiple gradation paints the trails thinner with time, like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW soft key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the D: TARGET and A: TRAIL soft keys.

3. Press the C: GRAD soft key to select SINGLE or MULTI as appropriate.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice to finish.

Multitone Monotone

Multitone and monotone trails

2.18.4 Trail color

Trails may be shown target trails in blue, yellow, green or white.

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the D: TARGET, A: TRAIL and D: TRAIL COLOR soft keys in that order.

TRAIL COLOR

BLUE

YELLOW

GREEN

WHITE

Trail color window

3. Use the Trackball to select the color desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice.

2-18

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.18.5 Echo trail mode

Echo trails can be shown in Relative or True motion. (True trails require heading and speed inputs.)

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP key.

3. Choose TRAIL MODE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

TRAIL MODE

▲

~

{

▼

TRUE

RELATIVE

Trail mode window

4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

2.19 Echo Stretch

Normally, the reflected echoes from long range targets appear on the display as weaker and smaller blips even though they are compensated by the radar’s internal circuitry. The echo stretch function magnifies these small blips in all ranges. Two types of echo stretch are available: ES LOW which stretches echoes in bearing direction and ES HIGH which stretches them in both range and bearing directions.

Target

Bearing direction

Bearing direction

Range direction

Echo Stretch OFF "LOW" Echo stretch "HIGH" Echo stretch

Types of echo stretch

This function magnifies not only targets but also sea clutter and radar interference. For this reason, be sure sea clutter and radar interference are properly suppressed before activating the echo stretch.

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.

3. Press the D: E. STR soft key to select HIGH, LOW or OFF as appropriate.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

The display shows ES H (High) or ES L (Low) when the echo stretch is on.

2-19

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.20 Echo Averaging

The echo average feature, which requires a Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar, effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same position during every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.

To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs scan-to-scan correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo signals over successive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.

To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress sea clutter with the A/C SEA control and then do the following:

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.

2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.

3. Press the B: E. AVG soft key to select desired echo averaging.

OFF: No averaging

LOW: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance of unstable

echoes.

MED: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.

HIGH: Stably displays distant targets.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

The display shows EAV L, EAV M or EAV H when echo averaging is on.

(a) Echo average OFF (b) Echo average ON

Effect of echo averaging

2-20

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.21 Outputting TLL Data

Target position data can be output to units of the network and shown on their plotter screen with the TLL mark (X). This function requires position and heading data.

1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the target whose position you wish to output.

2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.

3. Press the D: TARGET soft key.

3nm

12/

H-UP

319. 9

°

M

TARGET

A

TRAIL

B

TLL

OUTPUT

C

ACQ

D

TARGET

INFO

E

RETURN

Requires ARP circuit board in Model 18x4-BB/19x4-BB series

NavNet radar. Not shown otherwise.

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

TARGET soft keys

4. Press the B: TLL OUTPUT soft key to output target position data. The TLL mark appears on the plotter screen at the target’s position the moment the B: TLL OUTPUT soft key was pressed. Further, that position is recorded as a waypoint on all NavNet units, under the youngest empty waypoint number on each NavNet unit.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

Note: The screen of the TLL recipient may be temporarily interrupted when receiving TLL from another NavNet unit. Press any key to restore normal operation.

2-21

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.22 Guard Alarm

The guard alarm allows the operator to set the desired range and bearing for a guard zone.

When ships, islands, landmasses, etc. violate the guard zone, an audio alarm sounds and the offending target blinks to call the operator’s attention.

CAUTION

•

The alarm should not be relied upon as

the sole means for detecting possible

collision situations.

•

A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls

should be properly adjusted to be sure

the alarm system does not overlook

target echoes.

2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone

To set a guard alarm zone, set the radar to transmit and do the following:

1. Press the ALARM key.

2. Use the Trackball to set the cursor on the top left corner (or top right corner) of the guard zone you want to set, then press the A: SET GUARD1 or C: SET GUARD2 soft key, depending on which guard zone you want to set.

3. Use the Trackball to set the cursor on the bottom right corner (or top left corner) of the guard zone area, then push the ENTER knob.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

1

319. 9

°

M

ALARM

A

SET

GUARD1

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

C

SET

GUARD2

319. 9

°

M

2

ALARM

GUARD 1

A

SET

GUARD1

B

ERASE

GUARD1

C

SET

GUARD2

E

RETURN

MOVE +CURSOR TO

ANOTHER CORNER OF

GUARD1 AND PUSH

KNOB TO SET.

+

317.2 ˚R

11.60

nm

(1) Drag cursor to top (or bottom) corner for guard zone and press the A: SET

GUARD1 or C: SET GUARD2 soft key.

The soft keys disappear and the instruction box appears at left-hand cursor.

E

RETURN

NO ALARM

+

39.9 ˚R

8.800

nm

(2) Drag cursor diagonally to bottom (or top) corner for guard zone and press the

ENTER

knob.

How to set a guard alarm zone

The equipment then searches for targets inside the guard zone to determine guard alarm type. If a target is found inside the guard zone, the guard zone type becomes an “Outward guard alarm,” and any target exiting the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. If no target is found, the guard zone type becomes an “Inward guard alarm,” and any targets entering the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. The guard alarm type is shown as G1(G2) IN or

G1(G2) OUT.

2-22

2. RADAR OPERATION

Note 1: When the radar range is less than the guard zone range “G1 (G2) IN” or “G1 (G2)

OUT” changes to “G1 (G2) ***.” The guard alarm function is not available while this indication appears.

Note 2: If the network radar is set to standby while the guard alarm is active, the guard alarm is cancelled. The guard alarm is redisplayed when the radar is set to transmit again.

2.22.2 When the alarm is violated…

Any radar target violating the guard zone will flash, the audio alarm sounds, and the alarm icon appears in red. Additionally the message “TARGET ENTERED INTO

GUARD1(GUARD2)” or “TARGET LEFT FROM GUARD1(GUARD2)” is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm.

2.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm

1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.

2. Press the B: ERASE GUARD1 or D: ERASE GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.

3. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

2.23 Watchman

2.23.1 How watchman works

The watchman function periodically transmits radar pulses for one minute to check for targets in a guard zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is cancelled, the audio alarm sounds and the radar continues transmitting. If no target is found the radar goes into standby for the number of minutes specified on the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. This feature is useful when you do not need the radar’s function continuously but want to be alerted to radar targets in a specific area. “WTCH” appears at the top left corner when

Watchman is active.

Tx

ST-BY

*

Tx ST-BY

*

1 min

5,10 or

20 min

1 min

5,10 or

20 min

* Beeps emitted just before radar transmits.

Watchman starts

How watchman works

2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman

1. Set a guard zone. (See the paragraph 2.22.)

2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.

3. Press the C: NAV FUNC soft key.

4. Press the A: W. MAN ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

2-23

2. RADAR OPERATION

Note: When the watchman is activated and no guard zone is active, the message “PLEASE

SET GUARD ZONE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears. Press any key and then set a guard zone.

2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval

The watchman standby interval, that is, the number of minutes the radar is in standby, can be set to 5, 10 or 20 minutes as follows:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.

3. Select WATCHMAN TIME, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

WATCHMAN

 TIME

  5 minutes

10

 minutes

20

 minutes

Watchman window

4. Select time desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

2.24 Suppressing Second-trace Echoes

In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets may appear as false echoes

(second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is received one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been transmitted.

Tx repetition

Second-trace echo

False echo range

Actual range

Second-trace echoes

To activate or deactivate the second-trace echo rejector do the following:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.

3. Use the Trackball to select 2ND ECHO REJECTION, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Choose ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

2-24

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.25 Waypoint Marker

A waypoint marker, showing the location of the destination waypoint set on the plotter, may be inscribed on the radar display.

12/

HU

L 3nm

SP

Waypoint marker

319. 9

°

M

NAV

FUNC

A

W. MAN

ON /

OFF

B

WPT MK

ON

/ OFF

E

RETURN

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

Waypoint marker

1. If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.

2. Press the C: NAV FUNC soft key.

3. Press the B: WPT MK ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

2-25

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.26 ARP, TTM Operation

When the radar source is an ARP-equipped Model 18x4-BB/19x4-BB series network radar, you can manually and automatically acquire and track ten targets. Once a target is acquired automatically or manually it is automatically tracked within 0.1 to 32 nm. If the FURUNO heading sensor PG-1000 is used, the data sentence “RMC” is necessary.

Alternatively, you can display the tracks of other ships by receiving the data sentence TTM

(Tracked Target Message) via the NETWORK or NMEA port on the processor unit.

However, targets cannot be acquired.

Note: When using your unit as remote display, you cannot change the range of the main radar at the remote display. For the target acquisition, set the range individually.

Usage precautions for ARP

CAUTION

No one navigational aid should be relied upon for the safety of vessel and crew.

The navigator has the responsibility to check all aids available to confirm position. Electronic aids are not a substitute for basic navigational principles and common sense.

•

This auto plotter automatically tracks an

automatically or manually acquired radar

target and calculates its course and

speed, indicating them by a vector. Since

the data generated by the auto plotter

are based on what radar targets are

selected, the radar must always be

optimally tuned for use with the auto

plotter, to ensure required targets will not

be lost or unwanted targets such as sea

returns and noise will not be acquired

and tracked.

•

A target does not always mean a land-

mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels

but can imply returns from sea surface

and clutter. As the level of clutter changes

with environment, the operator should

properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN

and GAIN controls to be sure target

echoes are not eliminated from the

radar screen.

CAUTION

The plotting accuracy and response of this auto plotter meets IMO standards.

Tracking accuracy is affected by the following:

•

Tracking accuracy is affected by course

change. One to two minutes is required to

restore vectors to full accuracy after an

abrupt course change. (The actual

amount depends on gyrocompass

specifications.)

•

The amount of tracking delay is inversely

proportional to the relative speed of the

target. Delay is on the order of 15-30

seconds for high relative speed; 30-60

seconds for low relative speed.

Display accuracy is affected by the following:

•

Echo intensity

•

Radar transmission pulsewidth

•

Radar bearing error

•

Gyrocompass error

•

Course change (own ship or target)

2-26

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.26.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM

1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.

ARP TARGET INFO INTERNAL ARP

CANCEL ALL TARGETS NO

ARP VECTOR MODE

ARP VECTOR TIME

HISTORY INTERVAL

CPA

TRUE

30 minutes

OFF

OFF

TCPA 30 seconds

AUTO ACQUISITION AREA OFF

TARGET ID NUMBER OFF

ARP

SETUP

A

EDIT

E

RETURN

ARP setup menu

2. Select ARP TARGET INFO, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the ARP target info window.

ARP TARGET INFO

▲

INTERNAL ARP

EXTERNAL ARP

OFF

▼

ARP target info window

3. Select INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP or OFF as appropriate.

INTERNAL ARP: The radar source must be an ARP-equipped Model 18x4-BB/19x4-BB series NavNet radar. Select this item also for a NavNet unit being fed ARP targets.

EXTERNAL ARP: Receive TTM data sentence via NMEA or NETWORK port. Target tracks are shown but targets cannot be acquired.

OFF: Turns off the ARP or TTM display.

4. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

2.26.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP)

Ten targets may be acquired and tracked manually and automatically. When you attempt to acquire an 11th target, the message “ARP FULL – ALREADY TRACKING 10 TARGETS!” appears for five seconds. To acquire another target, terminate tracking of an unnecessary target as shown in the paragraph “2.26.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets.”

Manual acquisition

When the automatic acquisition (AUTO ACQ. AREA) is set to on, up to five targets may be acquired manually. If you attempt to acquire a sixth target, the alert message appears.

2-27

2. RADAR OPERATION

1. If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

2. Press the D: TARGET soft key.

3. Place the cursor on the target to acquire.

4. Press the C: ACQ soft key.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

The plot symbol changes over time as below. A vector appears about one minute after acquisition, indicating the target’s motion trend.

Vector

At

01*

 acquisition

01*

1

 min. after acquisition

3

01*

 min. after acquisition

*

 = Target number shown when TARGET ID NUMBER is

      turned on in the ARP SETUP menu.

Target

 Number

ARP plot symbols

Note: In case of the acquisition by an external ARP, the acquisition circle mark appears one minute after acquisition.

Automatic acquisition

The ARP can acquire up to ten targets automatically by setting an automatic acquisition area. When automatic acquisition is selected after acquiring targets manually, only the remaining capacity for targets may be automatically acquired. For example, if seven targets have been manually acquired, three targets may be automatically acquired.

45

°

port

2.0

 - 2.5 nm

Automatic

 acquisition area

45

°

starboard

1. Press the MENU key to show the main

Automatic acquisition area

menu.

2. Press the C: ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.

3. Operate the Trackball to select AUTO ACQUISITION AREA.

4. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the automatic acquisition area window.

AUTO ACQ. AREA

▲

▼

ON

OFF

Automatic acquisition area window

5. Select ON, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. An acquisition area of 2.0 to 2.5 miles in range and ±45º on either side of the heading line in bearing appears.

Note: Targets being tracked in automatic acquisition are continuously tracked when switching to manual acquisition.

2-28

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.26.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM)

Target number can be shown for ARP and TTM targets as below.

ARP

Target

Number

12/

3nm

LP

H-UP

01

319. 9

°

T

TARGET

A

TRAIL

B

TLL

OUTPUT

C

ACQ

D

TARGET

INFO

E

RETURN

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

ARP target number

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the C: ARP SETUP soft key.

3. Select TARGET ID NUMBER.

4. Press the A: EDIT soft key.

5. Select ON or OFF as appropriate.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

2.26.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets

When ten targets have been acquired, no more acquisition occurs unless targets are cancelled. If you need to acquire additional targets, you must first cancel one or more individual targets, or all targets, using one of the procedures below.

Terminating tracking of selected targets

1. Place the cursor on the target to terminate tracking.

2. Press the CLEAR key to terminate tracking and erase the target.

Terminating tracking of all targets

1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key.

2. Select CANCEL ALL TARGETS.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Select YES.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

CANCEL ALL TARGETS

▲

YES

NO

▼

Cancel all targets window

2-29

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.26.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)

What is a vector?

A vector is a line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed and course of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length (time) in order to evaluate the risk of collision with any target.

Vector

Vector

Vector reference, vector time

You may reference the vectors to North (True, requires heading and speed data) or ship’s heading (relative) as desired. Vector time can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 3, 6, 15 or 30 minutes.

1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.

2. Operate the Trackball to select ARP VECTOR MODE.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector mode window.

ARP

 VECTOR MODE

RELATIVE

TRUE

ARP vector mode window

4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Select ARP VECTOR TIME, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector time window.

ARP VECTOR TIME

▲

30 seconds

1 minute

3 minutes

6 minutes

15 minutes

30 minutes

▼

ARP vector time window

7. Operate the Trackball to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min and 30 min.

8. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

9. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

2-30

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.26.6 Displaying past position (ARP)

This ARP can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past positions of any targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the spacing between dots.

Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.

(a)

 Ship turning

(b)

 Ship running 

      straight

(c)

 Ship reduced

     speed

(d)

 Ship increased

     speed

Past position displays

To turn the past position display on or off:

1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key.

2. Operate the Trackball to select HISTORY INTERVAL.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the history interval window.

HISTORY INTERVAL

▲

▼

OFF

30 seconds

1 minute

3 minutes

6 minutes

History interval window

4. Operate the Trackball to select history interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min and 6 min, or select OFF to turn off the past position display.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

2.26.7 ARP, TTM target data

You can show motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA) for ARP or

TTM targets. Note that TARGET ID NUMBER, in the ARP SETUP menu, must be turned on to display this data.

1. Place the cursor on the target whose data you want to see.

2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.

3. Press the D: TARGET and D: TARGET INFO soft keys. The data of the selected target appears at the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (If an EBL/VRM data box is displayed the ARP (TTM) data box will be under it.)

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

To erase ARP/TTM target data, select the corresponding target with the cursor, then press the CLEAR key.

2-31

2. RADAR OPERATION

Cursor

ARP

Target

3nm

12/

H-UP

01

319. 9

°

T

TARGET

A

TRAIL

B

TLL

OUTPUT

C

ACQ

D

TARGET

INFO

E

RETURN

No.01 VECTOR TRUE 15min

CSE 359.9°T SPD 12.5kt

CPA 2.21nm TCPA 12:35

+

359.9 ˚R

11.70

nm

CPA and TCPA

Course and Speed

Target No., Vector Reference (True), Vector Time

ARP target data

2.26.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)

When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range or its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm sounds and the speaker icon appears (in red). In addition, the target plot symbol of the offending target changes to a triangle and flashes together with its vector. You may silence the audio alarm with the CLEAR key. Press the ALARM key and the message “COLLISION ALARM” appears. Press the C: CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. The

ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each track to own ship.

This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with own ship.

However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar controls are properly adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets effectively.

CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size, tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.

CAUTION

The CPA/TCPA alarm should never be relied upon as the sole means for detecting the risk of collision. The navigator is not relieved of the responsibility to keep visual lookout for avoiding collisions, whether or not the radar or other plotting aid is in use.

2-32

Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm range:

1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key.

2. Operate the Trackball to select CPA.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.

4. Select a CPA limit desired from 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 3 nm, 5 nm and 6 nm with the Trackball.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key. The ARP SETUP menu reappears.

6. Operate the Trackball to select TCPA.

7. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.

8. Select a TCPA limit from 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 6 min and 12 min.

9. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

2.26.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)

When the system detects a lost target, the target symbol becomes a diamond and tracking is discontinued after one minute.

2. RADAR OPERATION

CPA

▲

~

{

{

{

{

{

{

▼

OFF

0.5nm

1nm

2nm

3nm

5nm

6nm

CPA distance

TCPA

▲

~

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

▼

30 seconds

1 minute

2 minutes

3 minutes

4 minutes

5 minutes

6 minutes

12 minutes

TCPA time

01

Lost target mark

Canceling a lost target

1. Place the cursor on the target.

2. Press the CLEAR key.

2-33

2. RADAR OPERATION

2.27 Interpreting the Radar Display

2.27.1 False echoes

Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or disappear even if there are targets. False target situations may be recognized, however, if you understand why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.

Multiple echoes

Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often removed by decreasing the gain

(sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C

SEA control.

Sidelobe echoes

Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side of the beam. This stray RF is called a

“sidelobe.” If a target exists where it can be detected by the sidelobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range. Sidelobes show usually only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.

Virtual image

A relatively large target close to your ship may show at two positions on the screen.

One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the screen.

Virtual image

Own ship

;;

Target

Target A

Target B

(Spurious)

Target B

(True)

Target ship

Own ship

;;

Mirror image of target ship

True echo

Multiple echoes

Sidelobe echoes

True echo

Multiple echo

False echo

Virtual image

2-34

2. RADAR OPERATION

Shadow sector

Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a non-detecting sector or blind spot may be produced.

Within this sector, targets can not be detected.

2.27.2 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)

Radar antenna

Radar mast

A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4

µs) through the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5

µs) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.

When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display may show also the

12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots.

They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.

Screen A: When SART Screen B: When SART

is distant

Echo from SART Radar antenna beamwidth

is close

Lines of 12 dots are displayed in concentric

24 NM

1.5 NM

Echo from

SART

Position of

SART

Own ship position

SART mark length

7.5

µ

Sweep time

95

µ s

Own ship position

Radar receiver bandwidth

Position of

SART

Sweep start

Low speed sweep signal

High speed sweep signal

Appearance of SART signal on the radar display

2-35

2. RADAR OPERATION

General procedure for detecting SART response

1. Use the range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART responses is about 0.6 nm (1125 m) to distinguish the SART.

2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression (if applicable).

3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.

2.27.3 Racon (Radar Beacon)

A racon is a radar transponder which emits a characteristic signal when triggered by a ship’s radar (usually only the 3 centimeter band). The signal may be emitted on the same frequency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it is superimposed on the ship's radar display automatically.

The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line originating at a point just beyond the position of the radar beacon or as a Morse code signal (see figure below) displayed radially from just beyond the beacon.

Racon

Appearance of racon signal on the radar display

2-36

You may show the plotter display over the entire screen, in the overlay screen with the radar display, or in a combination screen.

3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display

Scale

Nav data window

(Data changes with NAV soft key setting and cursor status. For details see next page.)

34

° 22. 3456'N 359.9°

M

TRIP

NU

080 ° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm

16.0nm

S

M

A

MARK

ENTRY

Icon (from left)

North Marker

Chart

Alarm

Track Hold

Chart Offset

Save

L/L Offset

Battery

Simulation

(See icon table on page A-12 for details.)

002WPT

FISH

BRIDGE

B

MODE

NTH UP

C

NAV

POS

E

D. BOX

ON /

OFF

Soft keys

Waypoint name

Own ship marker

Waypoint marker

Course bar

Full-screen plotter display

Track

Note: When GPS signal error is found, the following occurs depending on the device feeding position data:

FURUNO BB GPS Receiver: Alarm icon ( ) appears and the aural alarm sounds. Own ship marker blinks faster.

Other GPS receiver: The message “NO GPS FIX” appears and is accompanied by the aural alarm and alarm icon. If the GPS signal is missing for more than 90 seconds, the message “NO POSITION DATA” appears.

Nav data window

The data shown in the nav data window depends on the status of the C: NAV soft key and the cursor.

3-1

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Latitude and longitude of cursor intersection

Latitude, Longitude Bearing to Cursor

+

34

124

°

°

24. 3456'N 359. 9

24. 3456'W

°

M

TRIP

NU

59.9nm 99. 9nm

Cursor Mark Trip Distance

Range to

Cursor

Presentation

Mode

Waypoint data

(waypoint selected with cursor)

Waypoint Name

Waypoint Mark

Bearing to Waypoint Course

001WPT

359. 9

°

M

359. 9

°

M

TRIP

NU

19. 9nm 19. 9kt 99. 9nm

Range to Waypoint Speed Trip Distance

Presentation

Mode

Own ship position

NAV

POS

soft key

Latitude, Longitude Course

34

124

°

°

24. 3456'N 359. 9

24. 3456'W

°

M

TRIP

NU

19. 9kt 99. 9nm

Own Ship Mark Speed

Trip Distance

Presentation

Mode

Destination waypoint data

NAV

WPT

soft key

Time-to-Go to Destination

Waypoint Name

Waypoint Mark

Bearing to Waypoint

001WPT

359. 9

°

M

TTG

4D02H23M NU

19. 9nm

ETA

1st 13:45

Range to Waypoint

Estimated Time of

Arrival

Presentation

Mode

Own ship speed and course

NAV

S/C

soft key

Presentation

Mode

Course, Speed

Bearing to Waypoint

359. 9

SOG

°

M

BRG

RNG

359. 9

°

M

TMP

DPT

79. 9

°

19. 9kt 99. 9nm 345 ft

F NU

Turns off nav data window

NAV

OFF

soft key

Range to

Waypoint

Water Temp.*,

Depth*

* Requires appropriate

sensor.

Contents of nav data window

3-2

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.1.2 Nav graphic display

The nav graphic display shows the compass display or the wind display depending on the setting of GRAPHIC METER in the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu. For further details see paragraph 7.10.

Compass display

The compass display, shown in combination displays, provides steering information. The compass rose shows two triangles: the red triangle shows own ship’s course and the black triangle, which moves with ship’s course, shows the bearing to destination waypoint.

The water temperature and depth graphs, which require appropriate sensors, show the latest 10 minutes of water temperature and depth data. The range of the depth graph is 50 feet and it is automatically adjusted with depth. You may adjust the update interval for these graphs on the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu.

Destination waypoint

Speed over ground

Range to destination waypoint

Speed through water

Time-to-go to destination

Destination waypoint bearing

(black)

TTG

003WPT

DPT

4 5 . 2 f t

0D 9H 59M w

RNG 9 9 . 9 n m

SOG 10.0

kt

0

BRG

3 5 9 . 9 °

M

N

ETA

STW

20

TMP

1 6 . 2 °F

10.0 kt

23th23:59

Estimated time of arrival at destination

Ship's course

(red)

E

Depth graph*

50

* = Requires appropriate sensor.

Shown (in red on color model) when direction to steer is "left."

Bearing scale

CSE

3 5 9 . 9 °M 10

Direction to steer

(green)

Water temperature graph*

Own ship marker

(Black when within

XTE range, yellow when over.)

XTE monitor

(See next page for description.)

Compass display

3-3

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Reading the XTE (cross-track error) monitor

The XTE monitor, located below the compass rose, shows the distance you are off course and the direction to steer to return to course. The own ship marker moves according to direction and distance off course. It is shown in black when the amount of cross-track error is within the XTE monitor range and yellow when it is over. An arrow appears at the right or left side of the XTE monitor and it shows the direction to steer to return to intended course.

It is shown in red when you should steer left, and green when you should steer right. In the example on the previous page you would steer right to return to course. To maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays at the center of the XTE monitor.

Soft keys

You can show the soft keys for the compass display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.

E: COMPSS CNTRL: On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch control to the compass display by pressing the E: CNTRL soft key to select COMPSS.

C: EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure below for how to set.

A: RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is set. Press the C: EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the A: RESET XTE soft key. The following message is displayed.

RESTART NAVGATION TO

CURRENT WPT.

ARE YOU SURE?

YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB

NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY

Setting the range for the XTE monitor

1. With the compass (or highway) display shown, press the C: EDIT XT-LMT soft key to display the following window.

XTE LIMIT

0 .1nm

XTE range setting window

2. Use the Trackball to select digit to change. Note that all digits may be cleared by pressing the CLEAR key.

3. Enter value with the alphanumeric keys.

4. Push the ENTER knob to set, or press the E: CANCEL soft key to cancel.

3-4

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Anemometer display

The anemometer display shows mostly the same data as the compass display. The wind meter in the center of the display shows wind speed in the bow direction, in graphic and analog forms.

QP<01>

TTG

RNG 4259nm

SOG

*D *H *M

20.0kt

ETA

STW 20.2kt

* *: *

DPT

123ft

WIND APPARENT

45

°

S

TMP

12.3

°

C

WIND SPEED

12.3kt

Anemometer display

3-5

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

The highway display, shown in the combination display of radar/compass/highway and plotter/compass/highway, provides a graphic presentation of ship’s track along intended course. It is useful for monitoring ship’s progress toward a waypoint. The own ship marker shows the relation between ship and intended course. The XTE monitor shows the direction and amount your vessel is off course – the arrow shows the direction to steer to return to your course and the numeric the distance you are off course. Using the figure below as an example, you would steer right 0.009 nm to return to course. To maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays aligned with the intended course line.

Destination waypoint

Range to destination waypoint

Time-to-go to destination

TTG

WPT001

0D 9H 59M

RNG 99.9 nm

SOG

10.0

kt

ETA

STW 10.0 kt

23th23:59

WPT001

Speed over ground, speed through water

Estimated time of arrival at destination

Destination waypoint

Intended course

Own ship marker

0.9 nm

0.009nm

0.9 nm

XTE range

Shown (in red) when direction to steer is "left."

Direction to steer

(green)

XTE monitor

Highway display

Soft keys

You can show the soft keys for the highway display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.

E: HIWAY CNTRL: On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch control to the highway display by pressing the E: CNTRL soft key to show HIWAY.

C: EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure on the previous page for how to set.

A: RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is set. Press the C: EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the A: RESET XTE soft key. See the previous page for details.

3-6

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.1.4 Nav data display

The nav data display provides comprehensive navigation data, and it is shown in a three-screen combination display. The user may select what data to display and where to display it. For details see the paragraph “7.8 Nav Data Display Setup.”

Appropriate sensors are required. Bars ( - -) appear when corresponding sensor is not connected.

Position

POSITION

34

°

34. 5678' N

120

°

34. 5678' W

WPT POSITION

34 ° 14. 5678' N

120

°

14. 5678' W

STW

10.0

kt

BEARING

9.2

°

M

DEPTH

1324.1

ft

SOG

10.0

kt

COURSE

101.6

°

M

RANGE

0.18

nm

TEMP

18.2

°

C

Depth

Water temperature

Bearing to

Waypoint

Range to waypoint

Speed through water

Waypoint

Position

Course

Speed over ground

Nav data displays

3-7

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Three types of presentation modes are provided for the plotter display: north-up, course-up and auto course-up. To change the presentation mode, press the HIDE/SHOW key followed by the B: MODE soft key. Each press of the key changes the presentation mode and presentation mode indication (top right-hand corner of the screen) cyclically in the sequence of North-up, Course-up and Auto course-up.

For C-map model, the sequence is North-up, Perspective, Course-up and Auto course-up when PERSPECTIVE DISPLAY is set to ON, on the CHART DETAILS menu. (See Chapter

7.)

North-up

North (zero degree) is at the top of the display and own ship is shown with a filled circle.

This mode is useful for long-range navigation.

Course-up

The course-up mode is useful for monitoring

34 ° 22. 3456’N 359.9°

M

TRIP

NU

080

° 22. 3456’E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm

16.0nm

A

MARK

ENTRY ship’s progress towards a waypoint. The destination is at the top of the screen when a

B

MODE

NTH UP

destination is set. When no destination is set, the course or heading is at the top of the screen

C

NAV

POS

at the moment the course-up mode is selected.

A filled triangle marks own ship’s position.

Note: The data sentences GGA and VTG must

WP-002

FISH

BRIDGE

E

D.BOX

ON /

OFF

be output from the NavNet unit connected to the

GPS navigator in order to correctly orient the own ship marker in the course-up mode on other

NavNet units.

Auto course-up

+

16.0nm

North-up

34 ° 22. 3456'N 272.4°M

TRIP

CU

080 ° 22. 3456'E 15.9 nm 99.9 nm

WPT 001

A

MARK

ENTRY

B

MODE

CSE UP

The course is at the top of screen at the moment the auto course-up mode is selected. In this mode, the current course is kept at the top of the screen when the change is within 22.5 degrees.

For example, if your vessel turns larger than

22.5 degrees to port or starboard, the chart display will rotate so that your course is pointing towards the top of the screen again. A filled triangle marks own ship’s position.

Perspective (C-map only)

+

16.0nm

Course-up

C

CENTER

D

GO TO

CURSOR

E

D.BOX

ON

/OFF

34 ° 22. 3456'N 272.4°

M

TRIP

CU

080 ° 22. 3456'E 15.9 nm 99.9 nm

A

MARK

ENTRY

B

MODE

AT CU

C

CENTER

Chart data is projected in perspective mode, for

3D simulation, during navigation.

D

GO TO

CURSOR

E

D.BOX

ON /

OFF

3-8

Auto course-up

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.3 Shifting the Display

The plotter display can be shifted as below.

1. Use the Trackball to locate the cursor at a screen edge. The screen shifts in the direction opposite of cursor location.

2. To turn off the cursor, press the C: CENTER soft key. This also returns the own ship marker to the screen center.

Chart scale (range) may be selected with the [RANGE -] or [RANGE +] key. The

[-] key shrinks the chart range (image is expanded); the [+] key expands the cart range (image is shrunk). The available ranges are as below.

Charts scales

1 2 4 8 16 32 64 256 2048

* km 0.23 0.46 0.93 1.85 3.70 7.41 14.8

29.6

59.3

119 237 474 948 1896 3792 sm 0.144 0.29 0.58 1.15 2.30 4.60 9.21

18.4

36.8 73.7

147 295 589 1178 2356

*: 2046 or 2047 in high latitude

3.5.1 Chart card overview

Your system reads Navionics GOLD charts or C-MAP NT MAX charts, depending on the type of processor unit you have.

When you insert a suitable chart card in the slot and own ship is near any cartographic object, a chart appears. If a wrong card is inserted or a wrong chart scale is selected, landmasses will appear hollow. Chart icons appear at the top of the display to help you select a suitable chart scale. The table below shows the chart icons and their meanings.

Icon Meaning

Proper card is not inserted or chart scale is too small. Press the ZOOM IN soft key to adjust chart scale.

Chart scale is too large.

Operate the RANGE key to adjust chart scale.

Suitable chart scale is selected.

Chart icons and their meanings

3-9

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement

When the RANGE key is operated, you will see several frames appear on the chart. These frames are called indices and they show you what parts of the chart can be enlarged in the current range.

Sample chart (Japan), showing indices

When a chart cannot be displayed:

A chart will not be displayed in the following conditions:

•

When the chart scale is too large or too small.

•

When scrolling the chart outside the indices.

•

When this happens, select proper chart scale.

Note: Indices can be turned on or off. For further details see “Chart border line” on page

7-14 for Navionics GOLD charts and page 7-16 for C-MAP charts.

3-10

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.5.3 Navionics GOLD charts

Data for aids to navigation

Selected Navionics GOLD charts can show buoy and lighthouse data. Simply place the cursor on the lighthouse or buoy mark.

Lighthouse Buoy

Place the cursor on a lighthouse or buoy mark.

Lighthouse mark (U.S> Point layers presentation)

Port service icons

Selected Navionics GOLD charts show services available at ports, with icons.

1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor) desired.

2. Push the ENTER knob.

3. Roll the Trackball horizontally to select icon desired at the top of the display. The services available appear directly below the icon selected.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

Detailed information of service selected

List of services at the port selected

34

°

22. 3456'N 359.9

°

M

TRIP

NU

080 ° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm

FIRST AID

16.0nm

B

GOTO

PORT c

SHOW

PORT

Emergency medical service

Fueling station

Water supply station

Traveler's service station

Customer service station

Marine equipment service

E

RETURN

Sailboat icon (Port)

Port Information center

Plotter display, showing port service display

3-11

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Current (or tide) data

Some Navionics GOLD charts provide for calculation of the current (or tide) data for any date. Additionally it displays the time of sunrise and sunset, moon shape (on current data.)

1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on a current icon (

T

).

2. Press the ENTER knob to show the current window.

3. Press the A: DATE soft key, and then enter the date desired.

4. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

+

124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm

Speed (KT): 0.45ft

Angle ( ): 142

0.74

0.61

21/08/02 +00

0.48

0.35

0 4 8 12 16 20 24

Max. Time Speed Aug. Slack

KT AT

Flood 4:58 1.2 323 7:58

Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15

Flood 17:15 1.1 145 15:15

Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15

Moonphase: FULLY IN 1 DAY

Sunrise: 05:03 Moonrise: 14:06

Sunset: 19:10 Moonset: 02:15

A

Current

DATE

E

RETURN

Current data display

Object information

You can see detailed information about a place selected by the cursor as below.

1. Use the trackball to place the cursor on the location you desire to know more about.

2. Press the ENTER knob to show the OBJECT INFORMATION window.

+

124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm

BLOCK AND TACKLE

BOATYARD

LAND AREA

DERDGED AREA

DEPTH AREA

POSITION

47 16.461'N

122 25.153'W

BRG. & RNG.

191 T 0.549nm

FIND

ROCKS

VALUE OF SOUNDING

62.2m

VERTICAL DATUM

MEAN SEA LEVEL

MOVE TRACKBALL <-/->)

RETURN

Object information window

When there are two or more pages, roll the trackball rightward to show the next page.

3-12

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

FIND function

When the OBJECT INFORMATION window is shown, objects can be listed according to their categories.

1. Press the A: FIND soft key with the OBJECT INFORMATION window shown.

+

124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm

PORT LIST

PORT SERVICE

TIDE STATIONS

CURRENT STATIONS

OBSTRUCTION

ROCKS

C

ENTER

E

CANCEL

FIND window

2. Operate the trackball to choose the category to list, and then press the ENTER knob.

Note: You can show the selected object on the plotter display by pressing the SHOW soft key.

3-13

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Cursor and data display

Besides its fundamental functions of providing position data, the cursor can also show information about caution area, depth area, source of data, etc. on C-MAP charts. In addition, you can display information about an icon by placing the cursor on it.

1. Move the Trackball to turn the cursor on.

2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the position desired.

3. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.

Objects

Spot Sounding

Depth area

Exclusive economic zone

Military practice area

Restricted area

Source of data

Objects window

4. Use the Trackball to select the item desired.

5. Push the ENTER knob to display details for object selected.

Depth area

Depth range value1

0.00 Meters

Depth range value2

1829.00 Meters

Example of caution area window

6. Press the E: CANCEL soft key to close the window.

7. Press the E: CANCEL soft key to finish.

3-14

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Icon data

You may place the cursor on any icon to find information about the selected icon.

1. For example, place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.

Place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.

+

34 ° 22. 3456'N 359.9°

M TRIP

NU

080 ° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm

16.0nm

A

MARK

ENTRY

+

B

MODE

NTH UP

C

CENTER

D

GO TO

CURSOR

E

D. BOX

ON /

OFF

Lighthouse icon

2. Push the ENTER knob to show data. For example, the following window appears for a lighthouse.

Objects

Lighthouse

Tower

Light

Underwater Rock

Depth contour

Depth contour

Depth area

Source of data

Object windows

3. Use the Trackball to select the item desired.

4. Push the ENTER knob to display detailed information.

3-15

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Navigation mark, fixed

Light.

Color

white

Height

7. 00 Meters

Light characteristic

occulting

XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

Sample lighthouse data

5. If necessary, move the Trackball downward or upward to scroll the window.

6. Press the E: CANCEL soft key twice to finish.

Tide information

The C-MAP NT chart card provides for calculation of the tide heights for any date.

Additionally it displays the times of sunrise and sunset.

1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on a Tide icon (

2. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.

T

).

OBJECTS

Tide height

Cartographic area

Source of data

Objects window

3. Use the Trackball to select Tide height.

4. Push the ENTER knob to open the TIDE window.

Objects

Port area

Port/Marine

Fuel station

Water

Electricity

Showers

Pubric toilets

Pubric telephone

Vertical

Cursor

+

34 24. 3456 N 359.9

124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024n

Height: 0.45ft

0.74

Draught: 0.65ft

28/10/03 -UTC05

0.61

43

° 32.860N

0.48

010

° 18.022E

0.35

0 4 8 12 16 20 24

A

DATE

Port information

LIVORNO (LEGHORN)

High Water(max)

0.86ft(13:30 L)

Low Water(min)

Sunrise

07:52L

0.35ft(21:00 L)

Sunset

16:53 L

E

RETURN

Tide window

3-16

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

5. Press the A: DATE soft key to open the DATE window.

CHANGE DATE

(DAY. MONTH. YEAR)

2 8. 10. 1998

LIMIT: 31.12.2099

Date window

6. Use the Trackball to position the cursor where desired, then enter date with the alphanumeric keys. Repeat to enter complete date.

7. Push the ENTER knob to show the tidal graph for entered date.

8. Use the Trackball to locate the vertical cursor on the hour desired.

9. Use the Trackball to shift the horizontal cursor to select draught.

10. See the time, height and draught indications in left of the tide graph for tide information.

11. Press the E: CANCEL soft key twice to close the TIDE window.

Port service icons

Selected C-MAP shows services available at ports, with lists.

1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor) desired.

2. Push the ENTER knob.

3. Select the service name desired. The services available appear.

4. Press the E: CANCEL soft key.

Note: When Port/Marine is selected, you can show a picture of the port selected, provided such data is available on the chart card.

FIND function

Objects

Port area

Port/Marine

Fuel station

Water

Electricity

Showers

Public toilets

Public telephone

C-map, port service display

When the Objects window is shown, objects can be listed according to their categories.

1. Press the A: FIND soft key with the Object window.

2. Operate the Track ball to choose the category to list, and then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob.

A list appears.

3. Press the E: CANCEL soft key twice to finish.

3-17

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Your ship’s track is plotted on the screen using navigation data fed from position-fixing equipment. This section shows you what you can do with track, from turning it on or off to changing its plotting interval. In the default setting, own ship’s track is turned on and is displayed in red.

Own ship track

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.

OWN SHIP TRACK DISP ON

OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR RED

TARGET TRACK DISPLAY ON

TARGET TRACK COLOR WHITE

INTERVAL TIME

TIME INTERVAL

DISTANCE INTERVAL

00m10s

00.10nm

MEMORY(TRACK & MARK) 2000 POINTS

(MARK MEMORY) (6000)POINTS

SHIP'S TRACK STATUS

TRACKING

TRACK: 1234/2000

MARK : 9/6000

TRACK

CONTROL

A

EDIT

B

TRACK

RESUME

C

ERASE

T & M

D

MARK

SETUP

E

RETURN

Track control menu

2. Use the Trackball to select OWN SHIP TRACK DISP.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the track display window.

4. Use the Trackball to select ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Note: The number of track and mark points used appears at the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS window on the TRACK CONTROL menu. Using the figure above as an example, 1234 points of track and 9 marks have been recorded.

Target track

Target track, NMEA format TTM (Tracked Target Message) data sentence, may be turned on or off as desired. The default setting is ON.

7. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.

8. Use the Trackball to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.

9. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.

3-18

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

10. Use the Trackball to select one of the following:

ON or OFF (no ARP or AIS): Turn on or off target tracks

ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.

AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks.

BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.

11. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

12. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

When your boat is at anchor or returning to port you probably won’t need to record its track.

You can stop recording the track, to conserve the track memory, as follows:

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.

OWN

 SHIP TRACK DISP

ON

OWN

 SHIP TRACK COLOR RED

TARGET

 TRACK DISPLAY

ON

TARGET

 TRACK COLOR

WHITE

INTERVAL

TIME

 INTERVAL

DISTANCE

 INTERVAL

TIME

00m10s

00.10nm

MEMORY(TRACK

 & MARK) 2000 POINTS

    (MARK MEMORY)

(6000)POINTS

TRACK

CONTROL

A

EDIT

B

TRACK

RESUME

C

ERASE

T & M

B

TRACK

RESUME

B

TRACK

HALT

OWN

 SHIP TRACK DISP

ON

OWN

 SHIP TRACK COLOR RED

TARGET

 TRACK DISPLAY

ON

TARGET

 TRACK COLOR

WHITE

INTERVAL

TIME

 INTERVAL

DISTANCE

 INTERVAL

TIME

00m10s

00.10nm

MEMORY(TRACK

 & MARK) 2000 POINTS

    (MARK MEMORY)

(6000)POINTS

TRACK

CONTROL

A

EDIT

B

TRACK

HALT

C

ERASE

T & M

D

MARK

SETUP

D

MARK

SETUP

SHIP'S

 TRACK STATUS

TRACKING

TRACK:

 1234/2000

MARK

  :       9/6000

E

RETURN

SHIP'S

 TRACK STATUS

NOT

 TRACKING

TRACK:

 1234/2000

MARK

  :       9/6000

E

RETURN

Track

 is plotted

Track

 not plotted

Track control menu

2. Press the B: TRACK RESUME soft key. The soft key now shows “TRACK HALT” and the indication “TRACKING” in the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS window changes to “NOT

TRACKING.” In addition, the icon “H” is displayed at the top of the plotter display and own ship marker becomes a hollow circle. To restart plotting the track, press the B:

TRACK HALT soft key

3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3.6.3 Changing track color

Track can be displayed in red (default setting), yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white. It can be useful to change track color on a regular basis to discriminate between previous day’s track, etc.

Own ship’s track

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the track color window.

3-19

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

TRACK COLOR

▲

▼

RED

YELLOW

GREEN

LIGHT BLUE

PURPLE

BLUE

WHITE

Own ship track color window

4. Use the Trackball to select the color desired.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Target track

Like own ship’s track, target tracks can be displayed in red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white (default setting).

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select TARGET TRACK COLOR.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the track color window.

4. Use the Trackball to select the color desired.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track

In drawing the own ship track, first the ship’s position fed from position-fixing equipment is stored into the unit’s memory at an interval of time or distance. A shorter interval provides for better reconstruction of the track, but the storage time of the track is reduced. When the track memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the latest.

Track plotting method

Track may be plotted by time or distance. The default setting is “time.”

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select INTERVAL.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the plot window.

INTERVAL

▲

TIME

DISTANCE

▼

Interval window

4. Use the Trackball to select TIME or DISTANCE as appropriate. Distance is useful for conserving track memory, since no track is recorded when the boat is stationary.

3-20

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Track plotting interval

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select TIME INTERVAL or DISTANCE INTERVAL as appropriate.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the time or distance interval window, depending on what you selected at step 2.

TIME

 INTERVAL

0 0m10s

Setting range: 0 min 1 sec (continuous) - 99 min 59 sec

Default setting: 10 sec

(When selecting TIME INTERVAL.)

DISTANCE

 INTERVAL

Setting range: 0.00 nm (continuous) - 99.99 nm (km, sm)

Default setting: 0.1 nm

0 0.10nm

(When selecting DISTANCE INTERVAL.)

Interval windows

4. Use the Trackball to select digit and enter value with the alphanumeric keys. The D:

CLEAR soft key functions to clear an entire line of data.

5. Push the ENTER knob or C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting

The equipment stores a total of 8000 points of track and marks. This amount may be distributed as desired, and the default setting is 2000 points of track and 6000 points for marks.

When you change the track memory setting, all tracks and marks in the memory are erased.

If necessary save the data to a memory card. For further details see the paragraph “6.1.2

Saving data to a memory card.”

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select MEMORY (TRACK & MARK).

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the track memory window.

      TRACK MEMORY

2 000/8000 POINTS

Track memory window

4. Use the Trackball to select digit and use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.

3-21

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

5. Push the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to change the track memory capacity.

6. Push the ENTER knob.

7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

This paragraph shows you how to erase own ship’s track and target tracks. You can erase ship’s track three ways: collectively, by color and by area.

Erasing own ship track by area

You can erase own ship’s track by area as below. This feature is not available when the overlay mode is in use.

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.

ERASE

 ALL TRACKS

ERASE

 TRACKS BY AREA

ERASE

 TRACKS BY COLOR

ERASE

 TARGET TRACKS

ERASE

 ALL MARKS/LINES

ERASE

 MARKS BY AREA

ERASE

A

EDIT

SHIP'S

 TRACK STATUS

TRACKING

TRACK:

 1234/2000

MARK

  :       9/6000

E

RETURN

Erase menu

2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE TRACKS BY AREA, then press the A: EDIT soft key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.

3. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you want to ease track from.

4. Press the C: START soft key or the ENTER knob.

5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to ease track from.

6. Press the C: END soft key or the ENTER knob.

7. Push the ENTER knob to delete the track selected.

8. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

Erasing own ship track by color

You may erase own ship’s track by color as follows:

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

3-22

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

ERASE TRK BY COLOR

▲

~

{

{

{

{

{

{

▼

RED

YELLOW

GREEN

LIGHT BLUE

PURPLE

BLUE

WHITE

Erase track by color window

3. Use the Trackball to select the color you want to erase, then push the ENTER knob.

4. Push the ENTER knob to erase the track color selected.

5. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

Erasing all own ship track

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE ALL TRACKS, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all own ship track.

Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

Erasing all target tracks

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE TARGET TRACKS, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all target tracks.

4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

Marks are useful for denoting important points such as a good fishing spot. Marks can be inscribed in seven shapes and seven colors: Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white.

{

✕

3.7.1 Entering a mark, line

1. Place the cursor where you want a mark to appear.

2. Press the SHOW/HIDE key (if necessary) followed by the A: MARK ENTRY soft key.

The mark is inscribed in the size, color and shape selected on the mark & line menu. The default mark attributes are size, large; color, yellow, and shape, hollow circle (

○

).

Note: The MARK ENTRY soft key can be programmed to enter the quick point. For details, see page 7-10.

3-23

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.7.2 Changing mark attributes

You can select the shape, size and color for marks on the MARKS & LINES menu.

1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.

2. Press the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL and D: MARK SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.

MARKS &

LINES

MARKS/LINES

 COLOR YELLOW

MARKS

 SHAPE

LINES

 STYLE

MARKS

 SIZE

.

LARGE

A

EDIT

SHIP'S

 TRACK STATUS

TRACKING

TRACK:

 1234/2000

MARK

  :       9/6000

E

RETURN

Marks & lines menu

3. Select MARKS/LINES COLOR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Use the Trackball to choose color desired (default setting: yellow).

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Select MARKS SHAPE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

MARKS SHAPE

▲

✕

▼

Marks shape window

7. Use the Trackball to select mark shape desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

8. Select MARKS SIZE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

9. Use the Trackball to select LARGE (default setting) or SMALL as appropriate.

10. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

11. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

3.7.3 Selecting line type

You may inscribe lines to denote good fishing spots, areas of special interest, etc. You can even construct simple charts.

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL and D: MARK SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.

3-24

MARKS/LINES

 COLOR YELLOW

MARKS

 SHAPE

LINES

 STYLE

MARKS

 SIZE

.

LARGE

MARKS &

LINES

A

EDIT

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

SHIP'S

 TRACK STATUS

TRACKING

TRACK:

 1234/2000

MARK

  :       9/6000

Marks & lines menu

2. Select LINES STYLE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

LINES STYLE

▲

E

RETURN

- - - -

▼

Lines style window

3. Use the Trackball to select line style desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key. The line style “dot” disables line drawing. Edge of lines is determined by mark shape. For example, selecting the circle shape will join lines with a circle.

4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

Erasing an individual mark

1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.

2. Press the CLEAR key to erase the mark.

Erasing an individual line

Place the cursor on an end of the line to erase, then press the CLEAR key. Placing the cursor at the intersecting point of two line segments will erase both line segments.

Erasing marks, lines by area

This feature is not available when the overlay mode is in use.

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE MARKS BY AREA, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.

3. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you want to erase marks and lines from.

4. Press the C: START soft key or the ENTER knob.

3-25

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to erase marks and lines from.

6. Press the C: END soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to delete the marks/lines selected. Press the ENTER knob to delete.

7. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

Erasing all marks, lines

You can erase all marks and lines collectively. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored.

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all marks and lines.

4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

3.8 Waypoints

In navigation terminology, a waypoint is a particular location on a voyage whether it be a starting, intermediate or destination point. A waypoint is the simplest piece of information your equipment requires to get you to a destination, in the shortest distance possible.

This unit has 999 waypoints into which you can enter position information. You may enter a waypoint five ways: at own ship position, at MOB position (see page 1-11 for details), by cursor, by range and bearing, and through the waypoint list (manual input of latitude and longitude).

Entering a waypoint at own ship position

Press the SAVE/MOB key momentarily to store your position as a waypoint. This new waypoint is saved to the waypoint list, under the youngest empty waypoint number.

Entering a waypoint with the cursor

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, A: WAYPOINTS and C: WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft keys. The plotter display appears.

3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor where you want to enter a waypoint.

4. Press the D: NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows waypoint mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: time and date), position of waypoint and proximity alarm radius.

3-26

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

MARK

34

°

NAME

0

135

°

21.000'W

COMMENT

0 1 W P T

°

0.00nm

00:00 01JAN00

34

°

44.000'N

LAT

°

21.000'W

3 4

°

1 2 . 1 3 4 ' N

LON

003WPT

359.9

°

0.00nm

1 3 4

°

1 2 . 3 4 5 ' W

34

°

44.000'N 359.9

°

0.00nm

0 . 0 0 n m

NEW

WPT

A

SELECT

MARK

B

COORD

TYPE

C

N< - - >S

E< - - >W

D

SAVE

E

RETURN

Waypoint window

5. If you do not need to change the waypoint data, press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint. The steps which follow show you how to change waypoint data.

6. Press the A: SELECT MARK soft key.

7. Press the A: MARK SHAPE soft key to open the mark shape selection window.

SELECT MARK

Waypoint mark shape selection window

8. Operate the Trackball to select shape desired.

9. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

10. Press the A: SELECT MARK and B: MARK COLOR soft keys in that order to open the waypoint mark color selection window. Select the color desired, then press the C:

ENTER soft key.

SELECT COLOR

▲

▼

RED

YELLOW

GREEN

LIGHT BLUE

PURPLE

BLUE

WHITE

Waypoint mark color selection window

3-27

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Note: You cannot change the shape and color of a waypoint when the proximity alarm radius for it is other than “zero.” To change shape or color, enter all zeroes as the proximity alarm radius.

11. You can change the name (6 characters), comment (13 characters), L/L position and the proximity alarm radius for a waypoint as follows:

Use the Trackball to select the NAME, COMMENT, position box or PROXIMITY ALARM

RADIUS field. (“Proximity alarm radius” provides for audio and visual alarms when your boat nears a waypoint by the distance specified. The proximity alarm must be turned on in the ALARM menu to use this feature. For details see the paragraph 3.11.6.)

Use the Trackball to select location.

Enter appropriate alphanumeric character with the alphanumeric keys.

12. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.

13. Enter another waypoint, or press the MENU key to close the menu.

Entering a waypoint by range and bearing

This method is useful when you want to enter a waypoint using range and bearing to a target found on a radar.

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, A: WAYPOINTS and D: WAYPOINT BY RNG &

BRG soft keys.

3. A red “X” appears at own ship position, and it is the origin point for range and bearing.

Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the location desired. Range and bearing from own ship to the cursor appear at the top of the display.

Note: The origin point of range and bearing can be shifted to the location desired.

Operate the Trackball to select location, then press the D: START POINT soft key.

4. Press the C: NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: date and time), position of waypoint and proximity alarm radius.

MARK

34

°

NAME

0 0 1 W P T

135

°

21.000'W

002WPT

°

0.00nm

00:00 01JAN00

34

°

44.000'N

LAT

°

21.000'W

3 4

°

1 2 . 1 3 4 ' N

LON

003WPT

359.9

°

0.00nm

1 3 4

°

1 2 . 3 4 5 ' W

34

°

44.000'N 359.9

°

0.00nm

0 . 0 0 n m

NEW

WPT

A

SELECT

MARK

B

COORD

TYPE

C

N< - - >S

E< - - >W

D

SAVE

E

RETURN

Waypoint window

5. If necessary, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in “Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-26.

6. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.

7. Enter another waypoint as above, or press the MENU key to finish.

3-28

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Entering a waypoint from the waypoint list

You can manually enter waypoint position from the waypoint list as follows:

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft keys.

3. Press A: LOCAL LIST soft key (lists waypoints in order from nearest to furthest, maximum 32 points) or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST (lists waypoints in ALPHANUMERIC order) soft key.

ABALONE

00:00 01JAN01

BRG 350.9

°

RNG 3.80nm

35

°

47.010'N

135 ° 21.000'W

CRAB

00:00 01JAN01

BRG

050.9

°

RNG

1.98nm

34

°

42.000'N

135

°

21.050'W

FISH

00:00 01JAN01

BRG

065.9

°

RNG

1.83nm

34 ° 41.000'N

135

°

21.030'W

LOBSTER

00:00 01JAN01

BRG

144.9

°

RNG

4.93nm

38

°

44.300'N

135 ° 21.010'W

PUSH ENTER KNOB TO

SEARCH FOR

--

WPT

ALPHA

A

GOTO

B

NEW

WPT

C

EDIT

WPT

D

ERASE

WPT

E

RETURN

FISH

00:00 01JAN01

BRG

065.9

°

RNG

1.83nm

34

°

41.000'N

135 ° 21.030'W

CRAB

00:00 01JAN01

BRG

050.9

°

RNG

1.98nm

34

°

42.000'N

135

°

21.050'W

ABALONE

00:00 01JAN01

BRG 350.9

°

RNG 3.80nm

35

°

47.010'N

135

°

21.000'W

LOBSTER

00:00 01JAN01

BRG

144.9

°

RNG

4.93nm

38 ° 44.300'N

135

°

21.010'W

Alphanumeric waypoint list

Local waypoint list

Alphanumeric and local waypoint lists

WPT

LOCAL

A

GOTO

B

NEW

WPT

C

EDIT

WPT

D

ERASE

WPT

E

RETURN

4. Press the B: NEW WPT soft key to show the waypoint window (see the figure on the previous page). Own ship position is shown in the position box.

5. Select the position box and enter position desired.

6. If desired, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in “Editing a waypoint from the plotter display” on page 3-30.

7. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Waypoint data may be edited from the waypoint list or directly from the plotter display.

Editing waypoint data from the waypoint list

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft keys.

3. Press the A: LOCAL LIST or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as appropriate.

4. Use the Trackball to select the waypoint you want to edit.

5. Press the C: EDIT WPT soft key.

6. Edit data as appropriate.

7. Press the D: SAVE soft key.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3-29

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Editing a waypoint from the plotter display

You may edit waypoints from the plotter display as follows:

1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.

3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to change. A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.

4. Press the D: EDIT/MOVE soft key. Three soft keys replace the D: EDIT/MOVE soft key:

EDIT WPT: Edit from the waypoint entry window.

MOVE WPT: Move waypoint to new position with the cursor.

ERASE WPT: Erase waypoint. See paragraph 3.8.3.

5. Press the appropriate soft key. For the “EDIT WPT,” the waypoint entry window appears; edit data as appropriate. For “MOVE WPT,” do the following: line connects previous position and new position. changed on the waypoint list. If the waypoint is set as destination or is part of a route, you are asked if you are sure to move the waypoint. In this case, push the ENTER knob to move the waypoint, or press the CLEAR key to cancel.

6. Press the MENU key to finish.

Range and bearing from own ship to cursor

(1) Select waypoint to move,

then press D: EDIT/MOVE

and C: MOVE WPT soft keys.

(2) Drag cursor to new position,

then push the

ENTER

knob.

+

34 ° 22. 345'N 86.6°

M

TRIP

NU

080

° 22. 345'E 4.53nm 99.9 nm

16.0nm

FISH

WP-002

BRIDGE

C

RNG

BRG

E

CANCEL

Press to alternately display range/bearing from own ship to cursor, range/bearing from original waypoint position to cursor position.

Below is an example of the range/bearing from original waypoint position to cursor position.

+

34 ° 22. 3456'N FROM 5.3°M

080

° 22. 3456'E FISH 1.45 nm

Plotter display

Erasing a waypoint directly from the plotter display

1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to erase. A flashing diamond mark appears over the waypoint when the waypoint is correctly selected.

2. Press the CLEAR key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.

3. Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen and the waypoint list.

3-30

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Erasing a waypoint from the menu

1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.

3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to erase. A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.

4. Press the D: EDIT/MOVE soft key followed by the D: ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.

5. Push the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen and the waypoint list.

Erasing a waypoint from the waypoint list

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft keys.

3. Press the A: LOCAL LIST or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key.

4. Use the Trackball to select the waypoint you want to erase.

5. Press the D: ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.

6. Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from both the waypoint list and the plotter screen (if it is currently displayed).

7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (Navionics GOLD charts)

You may change the size of all waypoint marks to small or large (default), or you may turn them off.

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and C: CHART CONFIGURATION soft keys.

CHART

CONFIG

LAT/LON GRID

TEXT INFORMATION

WAYPOINTS

WAYPOINT NAMES

CHART BORDER LINES

LANDMASS

BACKGROUND

NAVAIDS

LIGHT SECTOR INFO

OTHER SYMBOLS

MARK SIZE

GREEN

ON

LARGE

ON

ON

BRT YELLOW

BLACK

ON

ON

WHITE

LARGE

A

EDIT

B

CNTOUR

LINE

E

RETURN

Chart configuration menu

3. Use the Trackball to select WAYPOINTS.

4. Press the A: EDIT soft key.

3-31

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

5. Use the Trackball to select LARGE, SMALL or OFF.

LARGE: Shows mark in actual shape.

SMALL: Displays all waypoints with an “X” regardless of mark shape selected.

OFF: Turns off all waypoints and their names. Waypoints currently used in navigation are shown regardless of this setting.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

You can search for a waypoint through the alphanumeric waypoint list as follows:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, A: WAYPOINTS and B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft keys to show the alphanumeric list.

ABALONE

00:00 01JAN01

BRG 350.9

°

RNG 3.80nm

35 ° 47.010'N

135

°

21.000'W

CRAB

00:00 01JAN01

BRG

050.9

°

RNG

1.98nm

34 ° 42.000'N

135

°

21.050'W

FISH

00:00 01JAN01

BRG

065.9

°

RNG

1.83nm

34

°

41.000'N

135

°

21.030'W

LOBSTER

00:00 01JAN01

BRG

144.9

°

RNG

4.93nm

38

°

44.300'N

135

°

21.010'W

PUSH ENTER KNOB TO

SEARCH FOR

--

WPT

ALPHA

A

GOTO

B

NEW

WPT

C

EDIT

WPT

D

ERASE

WPT

E

RETURN

Search window

Alphanumeric list

3. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter up to three alphanumeric characters in the search window. Then, the waypoint searched appears at the top of the screen.

4. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3-32

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.9 Routes

Often a trip from one place to another involves several course changes, requiring a series of route points (waypoints) which you navigate to, one after another. The sequence of waypoints leading to the ultimate destination is called a route. Your unit can automatically advance to the next waypoint on a route, so you do not have to change the destination waypoint repeatedly.

You can store up to 200 routes, and a route may have 35 waypoints.

Entering a route with existing waypoints

This method constructs routes by using existing waypoints. This function requires SAFE

ROUTE CHECK (C-MAP only).

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key to open the ROUTE menu. (No data will be shown if there are no routes entered.)

Total length of route

Route name

Number of waypoints in route

001

LENGTH

25.6 nm

WAYPOINTS

35

002

LENGTH

56.7 nm

WAYPOINTS

2

003

LENGTH

21.1 nm

WAYPOINTS

3

004

LENGTH

21.1 nm

WAYPOINTS

3

PUSH ENTER KNOB TO

SEARCH FOR

--

1/20

ROUTE

A

GOTO

B

NEW

ROUTE

C

EDIT

ROUTE

D

ERASE

ROUTE

E

RETURN

Route menu

4. Press the B: NEW ROUTE soft key to open the new route entry screen.

3-33

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

ROUTE NAME

0 0 1

COMMENT

NEW

ROUTE

A

PLOT

B

LOCAL

LIST

C

ALPHA

LIST

D

CONECT

E

CANCEL

New route entry screen

5. If desired you can change the route name shown and/or add a comment. A route name may consist of six characters; comment, 13 characters.

6. Press the B: LOCAL LIST or C: ALPHA LIST soft key to open the waypoint list.

7. Use the Trackball to select a waypoint, then press the A: ADD WPT soft key to add it to the route.

8. Repeat step 7 to complete the route.

Note: To clear last-entered waypoint, press the C: ERASE LST WP soft key. Each press of this key deletes the last waypoint entered.

9. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the route.

10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Entering a route with the cursor

This method allows you to construct a route directly from the plotter display, using existing waypoints or new positions. Any new position will be saved as a waypoint, under the youngest empty waypoint number.

1. Follow steps 1-5 in “Entering a route from the route list” on the previous page.

2. Press the A: PLOT soft key to show the plotter display.

3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (C: ADD WP soft key appears) or new location (C: ADD NEW WP soft key appears).

4. Press the C: ADD WP soft key (or C: ADD NEW WP soft key).

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.

6. Push the ENTER knob to register the route.

Creating voyage-based routes

You can create routes based on your ship’s track. The route can be created automatically by time or distance, or manually. This feature is useful when you wish to retrace previous track.

The “SAVE” icon (SAVE) appears at the top of the screen when a voyage-based route is being created.

3-34

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the D: CREATE VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft key.

001

LENGTH

25.6 nm

WAYPOINTS

35

002

LENGTH

56.7 nm

WAYPOINTS

2

003

LENGTH

21.1 nm

WAYPOINTS

3

004

LENGTH

21.1 nm

WAYPOINTS

3

PUSH ENTER KNOB TO

SEARCH FOR

--

1/20

SAVE

ROUTE

A

NEW

B

SELECT

ROUTE

E

RETURN

Save route menu

4. Press the A: NEW soft key to show the new route window.

Note: If you want to tack voyage-based points onto the end of an existing route, select the route with the Trackball, then press the D: SELECT ROUTE soft key instead of the

A: NEW soft key. Then, go to step 6.

Next consecutive route number

ROUTE NAME

0 0 6

COMMENT

SAVE

ROUTE

A

BCKTRK

TIME

B

BCKTRK

DIST

C

MANUAL

USE FURUNO BACK TRACK FUNCTION

TO AUTOMATICALLY CREATE ROUTE

BY TIME OR DISTANCE.

E

CANCEL

Save route window

5. If required, you may change the route name and enter a comment.

6. Choose how to record points for your route, by time, by range or manual entry, by pressing A: BCKTRK TIME, B: BCKTRK RANGE or C: MANUAL soft key as appropriate.

For manual entry, go to step 8. For BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST one of the following displays appears.

TIME

 INTERVAL

0 0h01m

DISTANCE

 INTERVAL

0 0.1nm

(When selecting BCKTRK TIME.)

(When selecting BCKTRK DIST.)

Displays for entry of time, distance interval

3-35

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

7. Enter interval desired with the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys. Press the A:

START LOG and E: RETURN soft keys followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

At this moment, a voyage-based route will be created.

8. For manual entry of waypoints, do the following: new waypoint is created under the youngest empty waypoint number and added to the route. (At this time you may close the SAVE ROUTE screen by pressing the E:

RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key.) b) Repeat step a) as necessary. 35 waypoints may be entered.

To stop recording waypoints and save the route

You can stop recording waypoints and save the route as shown in the procedure below.

When 35 waypoints have been entered the message “Total 35 WPTS have been already registered in the route. Stop creating voyage-based route.” is displayed. In this case, automatically creating voyage-based route stops.

1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and D: CREATE

VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft keys.

2. Press the A: FINISH LOG soft key to stop recording waypoints and save the route.

3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Two routes which you have created can be connected as follows to form a new route.

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.

4. Press the B: NEW ROUTE soft key.

5. If desired enter route name and comment.

6. Press the D: CONECT soft key.

7. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter the route name for the first route, beneath FIRST in the connect route window.

ROUTE NAME

NEW

ROUTE

0 0 1

A

F < -- > R

COMMENT

CONNECT ROUTE

FIRST

SECOND

D

SAVE

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

FORWARD FORWARD

E

CANCEL

Connect route window

8. Press the A: F

<− −>

R soft key to select direction to follow the waypoints of the route, forward or reverse.

3-36

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

9. Enter the route name of the second route as you did for the first route.

10. Press the D: SAVE soft key.

11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Note: The maximum number of waypoints in a route is 35. If this number is exceeded an error message appears. In this case, delete waypoints in one or both routes so the total number of waypoints does not exceed 35.

Waypoints can be inserted in a route as follows:

Inserting a waypoint from the route list

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.

4. Use the Trackball to select a route.

5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE soft key. The route name screen appears.

6. Press the B: LOCAL LIST soft key.

ROUTE NAME:

COMMENT:

001

01

007WPT

48 ° 18.290'N

123

°

14.286'W

02

005WPT

48

°

17.341'N

123 ° 10.232'W

03

003WPT

48

°

20.261'N

123

°

11.658'W

04

006WPT

48

°

19.862'N

123 ° 04.190'W

LEG

90.0

°

2.86nm

322.6

°

3.08nm

75.2

°

4.99nm

152.5

°

19.87nm

EDIT

ROUTE

A

INSERT

WPT

B

REMOVE

WPT

C

CHANGE

WPT

D

COORD

TYPE

E

RETURN

Edit route menu

7. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the location where you want to insert a waypoint.

8. Press the A: INSERT WPT or C: CHANGE WPT soft key as appropriate. The local waypoint list appears.

9. Use the Trackball to select the waypoint you want to insert. (You can switch between the local list and alphanumeric list by using the C: LOCAL LIST and D:

ALPHA LIST soft keys.)

10. Press the A: SELECT WPT or A: CHANGE WPT soft key, whichever is displayed.

11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

LOCAL LIST

001

002

003

004

001WPT

34

°

44.111'N

135

°

21.134'W

002WPT

34

°

43.432'N

135

°

41.456'W

003WPT

34

°

14.124'N

135

°

21.567'W

004WPT

34

°

34.490'N

135

°

51.387'W

Waypoint list for editing a route (local list)

3-37

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Inserting a waypoint from the plotter display

Inserting a waypoint before first waypoint or after last waypoint in a route

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.

4. Use the Trackball to select a route.

5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE soft key.

6. Press the A: PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.

7. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the first (or last) waypoint of the route. A flashing diamond appears over the waypoint when it is correctly selected.

8. Press the C: ADD TO START soft key or the C: ADD TO END soft key depending on the waypoint you selected at step 7.

9. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (C: ADD WPT soft key appears) or new location (C: ADD NEW WP soft key appears).

10. Press the C: ADD WPT soft key (C: ADD NEW WP soft key).

11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Inserting a waypoint in an intermediate location on a route

1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “Inserting a waypoint before the first or last waypoint in a route.”

2. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on a line connecting waypoints. The C: SPLIT

LEG soft key appears and the line flashes when it is correctly selected.

3. Press the C: SPLIT LEG soft key.

4. Move the cursor to a new location or select an existing waypoint, in which case the C:

INSERT WPT soft key replaces the C: INSERT NEW WP soft key.

5. Press the C: INSERT WPT soft key (C: INSERT NEW WP soft key).

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route

Removing a waypoint from the route list

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.

4. Select a route.

5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE and B: LOCAL LIST soft keys.

6. Select the waypoint you want to remove.

7. Press the B: REMOVE WPT soft key.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Removing a waypoint from the plotter display

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.

4. Select a route.

5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE soft key.

6. Press the A: PLOT soft key to show the plot screen.

3-38

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

7. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to remove from the route.

8. Press the D: REMOVE WPT soft key. The route is redrawn, eliminating the waypoint removed.

9. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.

4. Use the Trackball to select a route.

5. Press the D: ERASE ROUTE soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the route.

6. Push the ENTER knob to erase the route, or the CLEAR key to escape.

7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3.10 Navigation

This section shows you how to get to a desired destination by “quick points,” waypoints, port services and routes.

Note: Reciprocal setting and canceling of destination is available by outputting the data sentence ZDA from the NavNet unit connected to the navigator.

3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”

The “quick point” feature allows you to navigate to point(s) without retaining the data indefinitely in your unit’s memory.

Selecting quick point entry method

You need to tell your unit how to set the quick point: 1 POINT, 35 POINTS (up to 35 points) or 35PTS/FIND. (For how to navigate to points/port services see “3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services” on page 3-41.)

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key.

3. Use the Trackball to select SET GOTO METHOD, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

GOTO METHOD

~

1 POINT

{

35 POINTS

{

35PTS/PORT SVC*

*For C-map: "FIND"

Go to method window

4. Use the Trackball to select a method.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3-39

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Navigating to a single quick point

1. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (D: GOTO WPT soft key appears) or a new location (D: GOTO CURSOR soft key appears).

2. Select “1 POINT” following the procedure in the above paragraph.

3. Depending on the selection you made at step 1, press the D: GOTO CURSOR or D:

GOTO WPT soft key.

A solid blue line with arrows connects between own ship and destination, which is marked as “<QP01>” for cursor-selected location or waypoint name in case of waypoint. This line shows the shortest course to the destination. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to the quick point. Range and bearing from own ship to the destination appear at the top of screen. The quick point location is saved to the waypoint list as waypoint “QP01.”

Navigating to multiple quick points

1. Select “35 POINTS” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry method” on the previous page.

2. Press the D: GOTO soft key.

3. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (C: SELECT WPT soft key appears) or a new location (C: ADD QP soft key appears).

4. Depending on the action taken at step 3, press the C: SELECT WPT or C: ADD QP soft key. “QP<01>” appears at the cursor location if a quick point is selected. To erase last-entered quick point (waypoint), press the D: ERASE LST QP (D: ERASE LST WP) soft key.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.

6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.

A solid light-blue line with arrows connects between own ship and the first point and all other points are connected with a green dashed line with arrows. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to your destination. Quick points are numbered in sequential order from QP<01> and are saved to the waypoint list. Range and bearing from own ship to the first destination appear at the top of screen. The quick points are saved as a route, under the name “Q>RTE” (Quick Route).

3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints

Selecting a waypoint from the plotter display

1. Operate the Trackball to select a waypoint.

2. Press the D: GOTO WPT soft key.

Note: GOTO method should be selected to “1 POINT” on the PLOTTER SETUP menu.

Selecting a waypoint from the waypoint list

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the A: WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.

4. Press the A: LOCAL LIST or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as desired.

5. Use the Trackball to select a waypoint.

3-40

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

6. Press the A: GOTO soft key, and the plotter display appears.

For either of the above methods, a solid light-blue line with arrows runs between waypoint selected and own ship’s position. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to the waypoint. Waypoint data appears at the top of screen.

Selecting an external waypoint

You can select a waypoint (or route) entered at an external plotter connected with NMEA cable. This function requires RMB sentence.

1. Press the MENU key, B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key to show the PLOTTER SETUP menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select QP.

3. Press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to show the QP window.

QP

{

EXT WPT (RMB)

~

INTERNAL

QP window

4. Select EXT WPT (RMB).

5. On a connected external plotter, set a waypoint (or route) as the destination.

Selected waypoint (route) appears on the NavNet plotter screen. (on radar screen, a lollipop appears to show the waypoint.)

3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavChart

TM

only)

A port service list which shows services is available at ports or harbors. (See page 3-13.)

You can use the list to set your destination as follows:

1. Select “35 PTS/PORT SVC” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry method” on page 3-39.

This procedure is necessary for NEAR SERVICE function.

2. Place the cursor on the location desired, then press the ENTER knob to show the

OBJECT INFORMATION window.

3. Press the A: FIND soft key to show the FIND window.

4. Operate the trackball to choose PORT LIST or PORT SERVICE, and then press the

ENTER knob or C: ENTER soft key to show the list.

5. Operate the trackball to choose the port (service), and then press the ENTER knob and

A: GOTO PORT soft key in order.

3-41

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

SELECT SERVICE

FUEL

WATER

OTHER UTILITIES

REPAIR

GENERAL

FIRST AID

OTHER INFO

ACCIAROLI

ACQUAMORTA

AGNONE S. NICOLA

AGROPOLI

AMALFI

BAIA

CAPRI

CASA MICCIOLA-ISCHIA

SELECT PORTS

POSITION

xx xx.xxx'N

xxx xx.xxx'W

BRG. & RNG.

xxxT x.xxxnm

GENERAL SERVICE

XXXXXXX

XXXXXXX

XXXXXXX

TM

Port services (NavChart )

Port services and sample port list

6. (NavChart) If you selected PORT (Navionics only) at step 4, use the Trackball to select a port, then press the A: GOTO soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push the

ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to the port, simply press the C: ADD QP soft key followed by the ENTER knob.)

(C-MAP) If you selected PORT at step 4, use the Trackball to select a port, and then press the ENTER knob or ENTER soft key. Press the E: CANCEL soft key several times to close windows, and then do the follows. a) Operate the Trackball to select the sailboat icon at the center of the screen. b) Press the A: GO TO soft key. c) Press A: QUICK ROUTE soft key. d) Press the C: SELECT WPT soft key. e) Press the ENTER knob.

If you selected SERVICE at step 4, select service mark desired with the Trackball and then push the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. Then, the display shows the locations of those services nearest you. (The figure below shows the location of filling stations in an area in southern Italy.) Use the Trackball to place the “hand cursor” on the port service icon desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push the ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to location selected, simply press the C: ADD QP soft key followed by pushing the ENTER knob.)

3-42

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.10.4 Following a route

Selecting the route to follow

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key to open the route list.

4. Select a route.

5. Press the A: GOTO soft key to show the plotter display. The cursor is on the waypoint nearest own ship.

FISH

359.2

°M 104.5°M

TRIP

83.2nm 10.0 kt

0.7

GOTO

ROUTE

16.0 nm

WPT002

FISH

C

GOTO

WPT

WPT001

D

RVRSE

ROUTE

CRAB

E

RETURN

Plotter display, route selected as destination

6. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint or leg in the route from where to start navigating the route.

7. Press the C: GOTO WPT or C: FOLLOW LEG soft key, depending on the action taken at step

A solid light-blue line runs between own ship and first waypoint. Green dashed lines connect all other waypoints. The arrows on the lines show the direction to traverse the route.

Navigating waypoints in reverse order

Press the D: RVRSE ROUTE soft key followed by the ENTER knob to navigate waypoints in reverse order. The arrows on the route line point in the direction selected.

3-43

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Restarting navigation

When you steer to avoid an obstacle or the vessel drifts, you may go off your intended course, as in Line 1 in the figure below. Also, if you don’t need to return to the original course, you can go directly to the next waypoint, as in Line 2 in the figure below. In these cases, use the restart navigation function to restart navigation.

Line 2

Obstacle

Line 1

Original course

Example of when to restart navigation

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the C: LOG soft key.

TO Waypoint (WPT name in reverse video)

Passed waypoint (gray characters)

Estimated Time of Arrival at destination

Replaces triangle when selecting a route leg.

ETA 23:59 30. APR

01

007WPT

005WPT

03

003WPT

04

006WPT

48

°

18.290'N

123

°

14.286'W

LEG

48

°

17.341'N

123

°

10.232'W

90.0

°

2.86nm

322.6

°

3.08nm

48 ° 20.261'N

123

°

11.658'W

48

°

19.862'N

123 ° 04.190'W

75.2

°

4.99nm

152.5

°

19.87nm

LOG

A

RE-

START

B

STOP

C

RVRSE

D

SPEED

Replaced by

"FOLLOW LEG" when selecting a route leg.

E

COORD

TYPE

Log display

4. Use the Trackball to select a waypoint or a route leg. When a route leg is selected the single arrow cursor is replaced by double arrows.

5. Press the A: RESTART soft key or A: FOLLOW LEG soft key in case of route leg.

RESTART: Line 2 in the figure shown above

FOLLOW LEG: Line 1 in the figure shown above

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3-44

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Setting speed for ETA calculation

Speed, which may be input manually or automatically, is required to calculate ETA

(Estimated Time of Arrival) to a destination.

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the C: LOG soft key.

4. Press the D: SPEED soft key.

SPEED FOR ETA

▲

SPD

0

10.0kt

GPS AVG. SPEED

▼

Select speed for ETA window

5. Enter speed manually in the SPD field, or use GPS speed data (if applicable) by selecting GPS AVG. SPEED.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection.

7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Switching waypoints

When you arrive to a waypoint on a route, you can switch to the next waypoint by one of the three methods below.

PERPENDICULAR: Automatically switches the destination waypoint when the boat comes passes an imaginary perpendicular line passing through the center of the destination waypoint or the boat comes within the arrival alarm range.

ARRVL ALM CRCL: Destination waypoint is automatically switched when the boat comes within the arrival alarm range. For how to set the arrival alarm, see the paragraph 3.11.2

Arrival alarm.

MANUAL: The destination waypoint may be manually switched by using the A: RESTART soft key (see page 3-44). This function is operative when “1 POINT” is selected as the

GOTO method (see page 3-40).

WPT

 2

WPT

 2

WPT 1

Perpendicular

Waypoint switched at this point.

Waypoint switched at this point.

WPT 1

Arrival Alarm Circle

Automatic waypoint switching methods

3-45

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

To select waypoint switching method do the following:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key.

3. Use the trackball to select WAYPOINT SWITCHING.

4. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the waypoint switching window.

5. Use the trackball to select appropriate waypoint switching method; PERPENDICULAR,

ARRVL ALM CRCL (default setting), or MANUAL.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3.10.5 Canceling route navigation

Through the menu

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.

3. Press the C: LOG soft key.

4. Press the B: STOP soft key.

5. Push the ENTER knob.

6. Press the B: RELEASE soft key.

7. Push the ENTER knob.

On the plotter display

1. Use the trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint selected as destination.

2. Press the CLEAR key.

The message “STOP GOTO?” appears.

3. Push the ENTER knob.

3-46

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.11 Alarms

The plotter section has eight conditions which generate both audio and visual alarms: arrival alarm, anchor watch alarm, XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm, proximity alarm, speed alarm, trip alarm, water temperature alarm and bottom alarm. (The bottom and water temperature alarms, which require depth and water temperature data, may also be set on the sounder alarm menu. For these alarms see Chapter 4.)

You may set up the plotter alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by pressing the ALARM key.

BOTTOM ALARM OFF

TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF

GROUNDING ALARM OFF*

GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*

ALARM2

EDIT

AUDIO ALARM

ARRIVAL ALARM

INTERNAL BUZZ

OFF 0.010nm

ANCHOR WATCH ALARM OFF 0.010nm

PROXIMITY ALARM OFF

XTE ALARM

SPEED ALARM

OFF 0.050nm

OFF

TRIP ALARM OFF 0000.0nm

ALARM1

EDIT

G ALRM

REPORT*

CLEAR

ALARM

ALARM INFORMATION

NO ALARM

NEXT

PAGE

RETURN

NEXT

PAGE

PREV.

PAGE

ALARM INFORMATION

NO ALARM

G ALRM

REPORT*

CLEAR

ALARM

PREV.

PAGE

Page 1

* C-MAP specification only

Page 2

Plotter alarm menu

3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off

Audio and visual alarms are released whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:

1. Press the ALARM key to show the alarm menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select AUDIO ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.

AUDIO ALARM

¡

¤

¡

INT & EXT BUZZ

INTERNAL BUZZ

OFF

Audio alarm window

4. Use the Trackball to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm), INTERNAL

BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF as appropriate. This turns on or off the audio alarm globally for all alarms, including radar.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the ALARM key to finish.

3-47

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.11.2 Arrival alarm

The arrival alarm informs you that your boat is approaching a destination waypoint. The area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you approach from the outside of the circle. The alarm will be released if your boat enters the circle. When the arrival alarm is active a red dashed circle marks the arrival alarm area. Note that the arrival alarm and anchor watch alarm can be turned on together.

Alarm range

Own ship

: Alarm area

Destination waypoint

How the arrival alarm works

1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select ARRIVAL ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the arrival alarm window.

ARRIVAL ALARM

▲

▼

ON 0.010nm

OFF

Arrival alarm window

4. Use the Trackball to select ON.

5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the

Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available arrival alarm setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

7. Press the ALARM key to finish.

3-48

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm

The anchor watch alarm informs you that your boat is moving when it should be at rest.

When the anchor watch is active, a red dashed circle with an “X” at its center marks the anchor watch area.

Alarm setting

Your ship's position where you start the anchor watch alarm.

: Alarm

area

How the anchor watch alarm works

1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select ANCHOR WATCH ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the anchor alarm window.

ANCHOR WATCH ALARM

▲

▼

ON 0.010nm

OFF

Anchor watch alarm window

4. Use the Trackball to select ON.

5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the

Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available anchor watch setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

7. Press the ALARM key to finish.

Note: If the arrival alarm range is changed, turn off the anchor watch alarm and then turn it on again to give priority to the anchor watch alarm.

3-49

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error) alarm

The XTE alarm warns you when your boat is off its intended course. When the XTE alarm is active two red dashed lines mark the XTE alarm area.

Own ship position

Intended course

Alarm setting

: Alarm

How the XTE alarm works

1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select XTE ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the XTE alarm window.

Destination waypoint

XTE ALARM

▲

{

~

▼

ON 0.050nm

OFF

XTE alarm window

4. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the

Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available XTE alarm setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

6. Press the ALARM key to finish.

3.11.5 Speed alarm

The speed alarm warns when your boat’s speed is within or under/over the speed range set.

1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select SPEED ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the speed alarm window.

4. Use the Trackball to select WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, or

SPEED ALARM

▲

{

WITHIN

000.

0 ~ 000.

0 kt

{

UNDER/OVER

000.

0 ~ 000.

0 kt

~

▼

OFF

OFF as appropriate.

5. For WITHIN and UNDER/OVER use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm range: Operate the

Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

7. Press the ALARM key to finish.

3-50

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.11.6 Proximity alarm

The proximity alarm alerts you when own ship nears a waypoint, which is marked with the proximity mark, by the proximity alarm radius set for that waypoint on the waypoint list.

When own ship is within a waypoint’s proximity alarm radius, the alarm sounds. The proximity mark remains on the screen until the waypoint is erased.

Radius in proportion to proximity alarm radius, which is set on waypoint list

001WPT

Proximity mark

1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select PROXIMITY ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the proximity alarm window.

4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

5. Press the ALARM key to finish.

3.11.7 Trip alarm

PROXIMITY ALARM

▲

▼

ON

OFF

Proximity alarm window

The trip alarm informs you when you have traveled a certain distance.

1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select TRIP ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the trip alarm window.

4. Select ON.

5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

TRIP ALARM

▲

▼

ON 0000.0nm

OFF

Trip alarm window

7. Press the ALARM key to finish.

3-51

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.11.8 Grounding alarm (C-MAP specification)

The grounding alarm feature continuously scans the electronic chart data in front of the boat to detect charted rocks, shoals, obstructions and land areas that could pose a threat if the vessel were to continue along its current course. The area searched is user-definable and is identified by a red triangle on the screen.

1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.

2. Choose GROUNDING ALARM from page 2 of the ALARM menu.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the grounding alarm window.

GROUNDING ALARM

▲

{

~

▼

ON 0.500nm

OFF

Grounding alarm window

4. Select ON.

5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter depth setting: Operate the

Trackball to set depth. Set shallow depth for shallow waters.

6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

7. Choose GROUNDING ALARM RANGE and push the ENTER knob.

GROUNDING ALARM RANGE

0 . 2 5 0 n m

8. Use the Trackball and alphanumeric keys to enter alarm range, that is, how far ahead to look for possible grounding situations.

9. Press the ENTER soft key.

10. Press the ALARM key to finish.

3-52

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.11.9 Alarm information

When an alarm setting has been violated, the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears and is red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. You can see which alarm has been violated on the ALARM menu. In the example below the arrival alarm has been violated.

1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm appears in the alarm information window.

Alarm

 information window

AUDIO

 ALARM 

ARRIVAL

 ALARM

INTERNAL

 BUZZ

ON

    0.010nm

ANCHOR

 WATCH ALARM OFF  0.010nm

PROXIMITY

 ALARM

OFF

  

XTE

 ALARM

SPEED

 ALARM

OFF

  0.050nm

OFF

 

ALARM1

A

EDIT

TRIP

 ALARM

ALARM

 INFORMATION

OFF

ARRIVED

AT

 WAYPOINT XXX !

 0000.0nm

C

CLEAR

ALARM

D

NEXT

PAGE

E

RETURN

Speaker icon

XXX = Destination waypoint name

Plotter alarm menu, page 1

2. Press the C: CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer if it was not done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon changes from red to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the cause of the alarm is eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been violated the message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this case, press the B: NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been violated.

3. Press the ALARM key to finish.

Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to background color when the CLEAR key or C: CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color does not change regardless of how many other alarms are violated.

3-53

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

Alarm messages

The table below shows the plotter alarm messages and their meanings.

Plotter alarm messages and their meanings.

Message Meaning

ARRIVED AT WAYPOINT XXX! (XXX = waypoint name) Arrival alarm violated.

ENTERED INTO AVOIDANCE AREA! Proximity alarm violated.

EXCEEDED ANCHOR WATCH LIMIT!

EXCEEDED XTE LIMIT!

Anchor watch alarm violated.

XTE alarm violated.

SPEED ALARM!

TEMPERATURE ALARM!

TRIP ALARM! MILEAGE EXCEEDED

GROUNDING ALARM

GUARDIAN ALARM (DEPTH AREA)

Speed alarm violated.

Water temperature alarm violated.

Trip alarm violated.

Grounding alarm (C=MAP specification) violated. See next paragraph.

Depth area (C=MAP specification) violated. See next paragraph.

GUARDIAN ALARM (LAND AREA)

GUARDIAN ALARM (INTERTIDAL AREA)

GUARDIAN ALARM (ROCK)

GUARDIAN ALARM (SHORELINE CONSTRUCT)

GUARDIAN ALARM (OBSTRUCTION)

GUARDIAN ALARM (NO DATA AVAILABLE)

Land area (C=MAP specification) violated. See next paragraph.

Intertidal area (C=MAP specification) violated. See next paragraph.

Rock alarm (C=MAP specification) violated. See next paragraph.

Shoreline construct (C=MAP specification) violated. See next paragraph.

Obstruction (C=MAP specification) violated. See next paragraph.

No data alarm (C=MAP specification) violated. See next paragraph.

3-54

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

3.12 Resetting Trip Distance

Trip distance is shown on the navigation data display. You can reset the trip distance to zero as follows:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and A: GENERAL SETUP soft keys in that order to show the GENERAL SETUP menu.

GENERAL

SETUP1

KEY BEEP

LANGUAGE

RANGE UNIT

TEMPERATURE UNIT

DEPTH UNIT

WIND UNIT

WIND DATA

SPEED AVERAGING

ON

ENGLISH nm, kt

° ft ft

F

APPARENT

60 seconds

LOCAL TIME OFFSET

RESET TRIP LOG

9H 0m

NO

TIMEOUT DISP. SETTING 15 seconds

SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION

START UP PICTURE DEFAULT

A

EDIT

B

AIS

OPTION

D

NEXT

PAGE

E

RETURN

General setup menu, page 1

Note: B: AIS OPTION soft key is currently inoperative.

3. Use the Trackball to select RESET TRIP LOG, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Use the Trackball to select YES, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

3-55

3. PLOTTER OPERATION

This page intentionally left blank.

3-56

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

With connection of the optional Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N you can show video sounder images on the display.

4.1.1 Selecting a sounder display

There are seven display modes from which to choose: dual frequency, single frequency, marker zoom, bottom zoom, bottom lock, bottom discrimination, and A-scope.

To select a display;

1. Press the DISP key and then select sounder display desired.

2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.

3. Press the D: DISPLY MODE soft key to show the display mode window.

DISPLAY MODE

DUAL FREQ

SINGLE FREQ

MARKER ZOOM

BOTTOM ZOOM

BOTTOM LOCK

BOTTOM DSCRM

HF: 200.0 kHz

LF: 50.0 kHz

Display mode window

4. Use the Trackball

or the ENTER knob to select a display.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to close the window.

Note: On menus which show the E: RETURN soft key you may use it or the ENTER knob to register setting and close the window.

4-1

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.1.2 Description of sounder displays

Single-frequency display

Zero line

Icons (alarm, battery, simulation)

Color bar

Temp. scale

°

50

F

40

30

Minute marker

Variable Range Marker

(White)

Time

Depth scale

S

M

0'30" 0

Fish echo

50.0

50

Cross-hair cursor

100

SOUNDER

SINGLE

A

SHIFT

B

AUTO/

D.BOX

Display mode

SOUNDER DUAL

SOUNDER SINGLE

SOUNDER M. ZOOM

SOUNDER B. ZOOM

SOUNDER B/L

SOUNDER B/D

C

FREQ

LF

/ HF

Water temp.

graph

150

D

DISPLY

MODE

Water temp.

display

120

LF

200

Bottom echo

E

SPLIT

/

Soft keys

Tx frequency

Depth

Indications on the single frequency display

Note: The water temperature display requires an appropriate water temperature sensor. It can be turned on or off with TEMPERATURE GRAPH on the SOUNDER MENU.

Selecting transmission frequency

The single frequency display shows either the LF (low frequency) picture or HF (high frequency) picture. To select transmission frequency, press the C: FREQ LF/HF soft key.

“LF” or “HF” is highlighted on its key label with each press of the key.

0.0

Dual-frequency display

The dual-frequency display provides both

LF and HF pictures. This display is useful for comparing the same picture with two different sounding frequencies.

LF picture

The sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect bottom conditions. The lower the frequency of the pulse, the wider the

LF HF

Dual-frequency display

detection area. Therefore, the low frequency is useful for general detection and judging bottom condition.

4-2

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

HF picture

The higher the frequency of the ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution. Therefore, the high frequency is ideal for detailed observation of fish school. low frequency high frequency

Sounding area and transmission frequency

Marker-zoom display

The marker-zoom display expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture to full vertical size of the screen on the left-half window. You may specify the portion to expand by operating the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which you can shift with the ENTER knob.

The area between the VRM and zoom marker is expanded. The length of the segment is equal to one division of the depth scale.

Note: The VRM is set independently from other displays in case of multiple displays.

Fish school

80

50

-

--

--

60

70

--

-

MARKER-ZOOM

DISPLAY

Fish school

HF

0'20"

0

42.0

50

100

--

--

--

--

--

NORMAL

DISPLAY

VRM

This part is zoomed.

Zoom marker

Marker-zoom display plus normal sounder display

4-3

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

Bottom-zoom display

The bottom-zoom display expands bottom and bottom fish echoes by the zoom range selected on the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu (see paragraph 7.9.3), and is useful for determining bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.

Bottom

80

0

10

20

30

--

--

-

--

--

--

--

20.0

HF

0

50

100

--

--

--

--

--

Zoom marker

BOTTOM-ZOOM

DISPLAY

NORMAL DISPLAY

Bottom-zoom display plus normal sounder display

Bottom-lock display

The bottom-lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half of the screen and a 10 or 20 feet (3 or 6 meter) wide layer in contact with the bottom is expanded onto the left half of the screen. This mode is useful for discriminating bottom fish from the bottom echo. You may select the bottom lock range from the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu. For details, see paragraph 7.9.3.

Fish school

80

10

8

6

4

10

2

0

-

--

-

--

-

--

-

--

-

--

BOTTOM-LOCK

DISPLAY

HF

0

50

100

--

--

--

--

--

NORMAL DISPLAY

Zoom marker

This part is zoomed.

Bottom-lock display plus normal sounder display

4-4

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

Bottom discrimination display

The bottom discrimination mode displays the bottom echo to help you determine bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom.

A long echo tail means a hard bottom.

Bottom tail

Long tail = Hard bottom

Short tail = Soft bottom

80

0

2

4

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

50

-

20.0

HF

50

100

--

0

--

--

BOTTOM

DISCRIMINATION

DISPLAY

NORMAL DISPLAY

Bottom discrimination display

Zoom marker

A-scope display (display only)

The A-scope display, available in all modes, shows echoes at each transmission with amplitudes and tone proportional to their intensities, on the right 1/10 of the screen. It is useful for estimating fish species and bottom composition. To turn on the A-scope display, press the D: DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode desired, then press the A:

A-SCPE soft key to show “ON” on its label. For modes other than SINGLE FREQ the screen must be split horizontally to show the A-scope display.

84

HF

50

100

0

--

--

--

--

--

A-scope display

No response

Weak echo (fish)

Strong echo (bottom)

SINGLE FREQ DISPLAY A-SCOPE

DISPLAY

A-scope display

4-5

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.1.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays

On combination sounder displays you can split the screen vertically or horizontally, using the E: SPLIT soft key as below.

0.0

0.0

E

SPLIT

/

E

SPLIT

/

HF

LF HF LF

How to use the SPLIT soft key (example: dual frequency display)

Automatic sounder operation is useful when you are preoccupied with other tasks and do not have the time to adjust the display.

4.2.1 How the automatic sounder works

The automatic sounder function automatically selects the proper gain, range scale and clutter suppression level according to the depth. It works as follows:

• The range changes automatically to locate the bottom on the lower half of the screen.

The range jumps to one step shallower range when the bottom echoes reach a half way point of the full scale from the top and to one step deeper range when they come to the lower edge of the scale.

• The gain is automatically adjusted to display the bottom echo in reddish brown (default color arrangement).

• Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is automatically adjusted.

4.2.2 Types of automatic sounder modes

Two types of automatic sounder modes are available: CRUISING and FISHING. CRUISING is for tracking the bottom, and FISHING is for searching fish schools. CRUISING uses a higher clutter rejection setting than FISHING therefore it is not recommended for fish detection - weak fish echoes may be erased by the clutter suppression circuit.

4-6

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.2.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.

2. Press the B: AUTO/D. BOX soft key.

AUTO MODE

▲

▼

CRUISING

FISHING

OFF (MANUAL)

Mode/frequency window

3. Use the Trackball or the ENTER knob to select CRUISING or FISHING as appropriate.

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key.

4.3 Manual Sounder Operation

Manual operation is useful for observing fish schools and bottom using a fixed gain setting.

The gain, range and range shift functions used together give you the means to select the depth you can see on the screen. The basic range can be thought of as providing a

“window” into the water column and range shifting as moving the “window” to the desired depth.

4.3.1 Selecting the manual mode

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.

2. Press the B: AUTO/D. BOX soft key to show the mode/frequency window.

3. Select OFF (MANUAL).

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key.

4.3.2 Selecting display range

Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to select a range. The default ranges in feet, meters, fathoms and passi/braza are as below. Note that the range cannot be changed in the automatic sounder mode.

Default sounder ranges

Range 1

15 ft

5 m

3 fa

3 P/B

Range 2

30 ft

10 m

5 fa

5 P/B

Range 3

60 ft

20 m

10 fa

10 P/B

Range 4

120 ft

40 m

20 fa

30 P/B

Range 5

200 ft

80 m

40 fa

50 P/B

Range 6

400 ft

150 m

Range 7

1000 ft

300 m

Range 8

ETR-6/10N ETR-30N

4000 ft

1200 m

80 fa 150 fa 650 fa

100 P/B 200 P/B 700 P/B

4500 ft

1500 m

900 fa

900 P/B

4-7

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.3.3 Adjusting the gain

Normally, set the gain to the point where excessive noise does not appear on the screen.

Use a higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower setting for shallow waters.

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low

Examples of proper and improper gain

Press the GAIN key to show the gain window, and adjust the ENTER knob or Trackball.

Current level is shown on the bar, and the setting range is 0-100(%). Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

GAIN - LF

▲

HIGH

57

LOW

▼

Gain window

Note 1: On the dual-frequency display, the gain can be independently set for LF and HF.

Use the C: FREQ LF/HF soft key to select the frequency for which to adjust gain.

Note 2: Gain cannot be adjusted in the automatic sounder mode. The message

“SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE CHANGED IN AUTO MODE” is displayed when you attempt to do so.

4.3.4 Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up or down as desired by pressing the A: SHIFT soft key followed by adjusting the ENTER knob. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.

Shift

Shift concept

4-8

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.4 Measuring Depth, Time

The VRM measures the depth and the cross-hair cursor, time.

1. Rotate the ENTER knob to shift the VRM; counterclockwise to shift it downward, clockwise to shift it upward. You may also use the Trackball to shift the VRM.

2. Roll the Trackball horizontally to adjust the cross-hair cursor to measure time.

Depth to VRM

Time for a scan line to travel from the right edge of the display to the cross-hair cursor

0'33"

40.0

Cross-hair cursor

0

50

100

VRM (white)

150

97

LF

200

How to measure depth and time

Note: If, when the range setting is over 1000 ft (m, fa, p/b), the VRM indication and depth scale may overlap one another, shift the cross-hair cursor slightly to show them completely.

Further, when the display is shifted, the depth scale may obscure the time indication.

Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic equipment on your boat may show itself on the display as shown below.

Interference from Electrical inteference other sounder

Types of interference

To reduce interference, do the following:

4-9

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.

3. Select NOISE LIMITER, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the noise limiter window.

NOISE LIMITER

▲

¤

¡

¡

¡

▼

OFF

LOW

MEDIUM

HIGH

Noise limiter window

4. Use the Trackball to select the degree of suppression desired (LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH), or turn the noise limiter off.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

Turn the noise limiter circuit off when no interference exists, otherwise weak echoes may be missed.

4.6 Reducing Low Level Noise

Light-blue dots may appear over most of the screen. This is mainly due to sediment in the water, or noise. This noise can be suppressed by adjusting CLUTTER on the SOUNDER menu.

Appearance of clutter

When the automatic sounder mode is used, clutter is automatically adjusted. To reduce low level noise in manual sounder operation do the following:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.

3. Select CLUTTER, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the clutter window.

CLUTTER

▲

09

▼

Clutter window

4-10

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select clutter rejection level desired; 0

(OFF) through 16. The higher the number the higher the degree of suppression. Note that the clutter suppressor may erase weak echoes. Therefore, turn off the clutter when its use is not required.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

Note: Unlike the signal level feature, clutter does not reduce display colors. However, if you do not wish to change the relation between weak and strong echoes, use signal level instead.

4.7 Erasing Weak Echoes

Sediments in the water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the display in green or light blue. These weak echoes may be erased as below.

Weak echoes

Appearance of weak echoes

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.

3. Select SIGNAL LEVEL, and press the A: EDIT soft key to show the signal level window.

SIGNAL LEVEL

▲

OFF

SL1

SL2

SL3

SL4

SL5

SL6

▼

16-color display

SIGNAL LEVEL

▲

OFF

SL1

SL2

SL3

▼

8-color display

Signal level window

4. Use the Trackball to select level of erasure or OFF as appropriate. The higher the number the stronger the echo that will be erased.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

Note: Unlike “clutter,” signal level reduces display colors. Therefore, if you do not wish to reduce colors, use clutter instead.

4-11

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

The white marker functions to display a particular echo color in white. For example, you may want to display the bottom echo in white to discriminate fish echoes near the bottom.

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.

3. Select WHITE MARKER, then press the A: EDIT soft key to open the white marker window.

WHITE MARKER

▲

OFF

▼

White marker window

4. Use the Trackball to select the color to display in white. As you use the Trackball, the number in the white marker window changes, the white marker on the echo strength bar shifts and the selected echo color is displayed in white.

←

White marker shows color currently displayed in white.

Color bar (16 color) when white marker function is active

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

To turn the white marker function off, display “OFF” in the white marker window.

The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run across the screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a fast advance speed will expand the size of the fish school horizontally on the screen and a slow advance speed will contract it.

The advancement speed may be set independent of or synchronized with ship’s speed.

4.9.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.

3. Select PICTURE ADVANCE, and press the A: EDIT soft key to open the picture advance window.

4-12

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

PICTURE ADVANCE

▲

2/1

1/1

1/2

1/4

1/8

1/16

STOP

▼

Picture advance window

4. Use the Trackball to select speed desired. The fractions in the window denote the number of scan lines produced per transmission. For example, 1/8 means one scan line is produced every eight transmissions. STOP freezes the display and it is convenient for observing an echo.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

Note: When using the plotter/sounder combination display, advancement of the sounder picture may be temporarily interrupted while the plotter display is being shifted or its display range is being changed.

With speed data provided by a speed-measuring device, picture advance speed may be set according to ship’s speed, the ship’s speed dependent mode. As shown in the figure below the horizontal scale of the display is not influenced by the change of ship’s speed, thus the speed-dependent picture advance permits judgment of fish school size and abundance at any speed. The choice “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s speed dependent mode, where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed.

Fish

 school shrinks as speed is

 increased; expanded as

 speed is decreased.

Same

 size fish

 schools

Speed

FULL

SPEED

HALF

SPEED

Actual

 Movement

Normal

 Mode

Fish

 schools are shown same

 size regardless of

 ship's speed.

Speed-Dependent

 Picture Advance Mode

How the speed-dependent picture advance mode works

4-13

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

Activating/deactivating the speed-dependent picture advance mode

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.

2. Select PRR LEVEL.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the setting window.

4. Use the Trackball to select SPD SENSING PRR.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

Note: Use the same speed data sentence (STG or STW) throughout the network for smooth advancement of the sounder picture. See the paragraph 6.5 for how to output data through the network.

4.10 Display Colors

You can select the number of colors and background color to display as follows:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.

3. Select HUE, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the hue window.

HUE

▲

1

▼

Hue window

4. Use the Trackball to select hue number, referring to the table below. (You can see the result of your selection on the display.)

Hue no. and background and echo colors

Hue No.

3

4

Echo Color

16 color

8 color

Background Color

Blue

Blue

Dark blue

Dark blue

White

White

Black

Black

9 Monochrome yellow, eight intensities

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

4-14

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.11 Alarms

The sounder section has five conditions which generate audio and visual alarms: bottom alarm, fish alarm (bottom lock), fish alarm (normal) and water temperature alarm

(temperature sensor required).

You may set up the sounder alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by pressing the ALARM key.

AUDIO ALARM INTERNAL BUZZ

BOTTOM ALARM OFF

TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF

FISH ALARM OFF

FISH ALARM (B/L) OFF

SOUNDER

ALARM

A

EDIT

C

CLEAR

ALARM

ALARM INFORMATION

NO ALARM

E

RETURN

Sounder alarm menu

4.11.1 Audio alarm on/off

The audio alarm sounds whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:

1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select ALARM AUDIO.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.

AUDIO ALARM

INT & EXT BUZZ

INTERNAL BUZZ

OFF

Alarm audio window

4. Use the Trackball to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm), INTERNAL

BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. External buzzer required to select “INT+EXT BUZZ.” OFF globally turns the audio alarm on or off for all modes, including radar.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.

4-15

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.11.2 Bottom alarm

The bottom alarm sounds when the bottom echo is within the alarm range set. To activate the bottom alarm, the depth must be displayed. Note that the bottom alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the bottom alarm on the plotter alarm menu.

1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select BOTTOM ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the bottom alarm window.

BOTTOM ALARM

▲

ON

0000.0-0000.0 ft

OFF

▼

Bottom alarm window

4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, enter alarm range with the Trackball and numeric keys: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric key to enter value.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.

4.11.3 Fish alarm

The fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within the preset alarm range. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.

1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select FISH ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm window.

FISH ALARM

▲

ON

0000.0-0000.0 ft

OFF

▼

Fish alarm window

4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Trackball and numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit the appropriate numeric key to enter value.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.

4-16

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.11.4 Fish alarm (B/L)

The bottom-lock fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within a predetermined distance from the bottom. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER

SYSTEM SETUP menu.

1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select FISH ALARM (B/L).

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm (B/L) window.

FISH ALARM (B/L)

▲

ON

0000.0-0000.0 ft

OFF

▼

Fish alarm (B/L) window

4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Trackball and numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric key to enter value.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.

4.11.5 Water temperature alarm

There are two types of water temperature alarms: WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF RANGE.

The WITHIN RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is within the range set, and the OUT OF RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is higher or lower than the range set. Note that the water temperature alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the water temperature alarm on the plotter menu.

1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select TEMPERATURE ALARM.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the temperature alarm window.

TEMPERATURE ALARM

▲

WITHIN RANGE

+000.0 - +000.0

°

F

OUT OF RANGE

+000.0 - +000.0

°

F

OFF

▼

Water temperature alarm window

4. Use the Trackball to select WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE or OFF as numeric key to enter alarm range: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric key to enter value. To switch between plus and minus and vice versa use the A: +< - ->- soft key.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.

6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.

4-17

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.11.6 When an alarm setting is violated...

When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears in red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. At this time the color of the speaker icon changes from red to background color. You can see which alarm has been violated on the alarm menu display. In the example below the bottom alarm has been violated.

To see which alarm(s) has been violated:

1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm is shown in the ALARM

INFORMATION window.

AUDIO ALARM INTERNAL BUZZ

BOTTOM ALARM 0050.0-0100.0ft

TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF

FISH ALARM OFF

FISH ALARM (B/L) OFF

SOUNDER

ALARM

A

EDIT

C

CLEAR

ALARM

Alarm information window

ALARM INFORMATION

DEPTH ALARM!

E

RETURN

Speaker icon

Sounder alarm menu

2. Press the C: CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer if it has not already been done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon changes from red to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the reason for the alarm is eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been violated, the message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this case, press the B: NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been violated.

Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to background color when the CLEAR key or C: CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color remains the same regardless of how many times another alarm is violated.

3. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.

Alarm messages

The table below shows the sounder alarm messages and their meanings.

Sounder alarm messages and their meanings

Message Meaning

DEPTH ALARM! Bottom alarm violated.

FISH ALARM!

TEMPERATURE ALARM!

Fish alarm violated.

Water temperature alarm violated.

4-18

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.12 Water Temperature Graph

The water temperature graph (appropriate sensor required) plots water temperature on the sounder display. (See the figure on page 4-3.) It can be turned on or off as below.

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.

3. Select TEMPERATURE GRAPH and press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Select OFF (default setting) or ON as appropriate.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

4.13 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate

Pulse repetition rate can be changed. Normally, the highest rate (20) is used. When in shallow waters, second reflection echoes may appear between surface and actual bottom echo. In this case lower the PRR level. The option “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s speed dependent mode, where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed (required speed input.) For further information about the ship’s speed dependent mode, see page

4-13.

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.

3. Select PRR LEVEL.

4. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the setting window.

5. Use the Trackball to select the rate for repetition.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

Too small setting reduces the number of pulse repetition. This may cause a problem to search fish schools. Select “20” unless multistage reflections appear on the display.

4.14 Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card

You may save the current sounder picture to an SD card, using a function key programmed to save the sounder picture.

1. Program a function key in order to save the sounder picture. See paragraph 7.9.4 for the procedure.

2. Hit the SHOW/HIDE key to show the function keys if they are not currently shown.

3. Press the function key programmed to save the sounder picture.

The sounder picture stops advancing and the message “NOW SAVING SOUNDER

PICTURE TO CARD” appears on the display while the picture is being saved. If no card is inserted, the message “PLEASE INSERT THE CARD. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears. If there is not sufficient memory remaining in the card the message “THERE IS

NO MEMORY TO SAVE PICTURE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears. After the picture has been recorded, normal sounder operation is restored.

4-19

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display

4.15.1 Zero line

The zero line (sometimes referred to as the transmission line) represents the transducer’s position, and moves off the screen when a deep phased range is used.

Zero line

Shift

Zero line

4.15.2 Bottom echo

Echoes from the bottom are normally the strongest and are displayed in reddish-brown, but the color and width will vary with bottom composition, water depth, frequency, sensitivity, etc.

In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting will cause a second or sometimes a third or a fourth echo to be displayed at the same interval between them below the first echo trace. This is because the echo travels between the bottom and the surface twice or more in shallow depths.

The color of the bottom echo can be used to help determine the density of the bottom materials (soft or hard). The harder the bottom, the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show only a single bottom echo on mud, a rocky bottom will show a second or third bottom return.

The range should be chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are displayed when bottom hardness is being determined.

Intensity difference in water depth

Second bottom echo

Rock base

Mud and sand

Bottom echoes

4-20

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

4.15.3 Fish school echoes

Fish school echoes will generally be plotted between the zero line and the bottom. Usually the fish school/fish echo is weaker than the bottom echo because its reflection property is much smaller compared to the bottom. The size of the fish school can be ascertained from the density of the display.

Size of fish school

Small school

Large school

Fish school echoes

4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration

When the waters are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface noise may appear near the zero line. As surface turbulence is acoustically equivalent to running into a brick wall, the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently. Similar noise sometimes appears when a water temperature difference (thermocline) exists. Different species of fish tend to prefer different temperature zones, so the thermocline may be useful to help identify target fish.

200 kHz tends to show shallow thermoclines better than 50 kHz.

In rough waters the display is occasionally interrupted due to below-the-ship air bubbles obstructing the sound path. This also occurs when the boat makes a quick turn or reverses movement. Lowering the picture advance speed may reduce the interruption. However, reconsideration of the transducer installation may be necessary if the interruption occurs frequently.

Surface noise

Caused by aerated water

Thermocline

Surface noise/aeration

4-21

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION

This page intentionally left blank.

4-22

Connected to an AIS Interface, your NavNet unit can show the name, position and other nav data of AIS transponder equipped ships.

5.1 Turning AIS Feature On/Off

1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.

KEY BEEP

LANGUAGE

RANGE UNIT

TEMPERATURE UNIT

DEPTH UNIT

WIND UNIT

WIND DATA

ON

ENGLISH nm, kt

°F ft ft

APPARENT

60 seconds

9H 0m

SPEED AVERAGING

LOCAL TIME OFFSET

RESET TRIP LOG NO

TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING 15 sec

SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION SAVE SHIP

WALLPAPER

POSITION & MOB

DEFAULT

GENERAL

SETUP1

A

EDIT

B

AIS

OPTION

D

NEXT

PAGE

E

RETURN

GENERAL SETUP menu, page 1

4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu. (The C: AIS

OPTION soft key is shown in grey unless the AIS Interface Unit or FURUNO FA-150 is connected.)

AIS DISPLAY MODE OFF

THE NUMBER OF AIS TARGET 100

PROXIMITY ALARM

CPA

OFF

OFF

TCPA

VECTOR TIME

VECTOR MODE

HISTORY INTERVAL

OFF

30 minutes

TRUE

30 seconds

AIS

OPTION

A

EDIT

E

RETURN

AIS OPTION menu

5. Choose AIS DISPLAY MODE and press the A: A: EDIT soft key.

5-1

5. AIS OPERATION

AIS DISPLAY MODE

▲

~

{

{

{

{

▼

RANGE 1.0 nm

SECTOR

CPA

TCPA

OFF

AIS DISPLAY MODE window

6. Choose desired option from the following and push the A: EDIT soft key.

RANGE: Choose to use the AIS function within the range you specify. Use the numeric keys to enter the range from own ship and then go to step 8.

SECTOR: Set an area from which to receive AIS data. Go to step 7.

CPA: Displays targets according to their CPA, from nearest to furthest.

TCPA: Displays targets according to their TCPA, from nearest to furthest.

OFF: Choose to turn off the AIS function, and then press the ENTER soft key.

7. If you chose SECTOR, do the following to set the area to use.

Choose the radar display if it is not already displayed. Head-up mode is chosen automatically. a) Rotate the ENTER knob to set the left side of the sector and push the ENTER knob. b) Rotate the ENTER knob to set the right side of the sector and push the ENTER knob.

8. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

9. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

Note 1: For the OFF setting, all AIS symbols are erased from the screen, however AIS functions continue internally.

Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when bow direction is changed in the Head-up mode.

Note 3: AIS is automatically turned off under any of the conditions noted below. a) EPFS or gyro alarm generated. b) Manual ship’s position is used. c) DTM sentence with no WGS-84 is received.

Note 4: In case of multiple display units connected via the NavNet network, the AIS feature can only be turned on or off from the display unit to which the AIS transponder is connected.

Vector mode

You may reference the vector to North (True, requires heading and speed data) or ship’s heading (Relative) as desired on the AIS option menu.

5-2

5. AIS OPERATION

When RANGE or SECTOR is selected, AIS-equipped ships are marked on the display at their current position with the appropriate AIS symbol as shown below.

AIS symbols

Symbol Description

Activated automatically or manually. The dashed line shows ship’s

SOG and COG (or STW and CTW). The solid shows target bearing.

Activated target

A target whose CPA and TCPA are within the CPA and TCPA values set by the operator.

Dangerous target

A target is declared a lost target when no data is received for three to five reporting intervals. When this occurs, the target is marked with the

(flashing) lost target symbol.

Lost target

Target selected on radar display. (Dashed square does not appear when target is selected on plotter display.)

Target selected for data display

5.3 Setting Number of AIS Targets to Display

Up to 100 of the closest AIS targets may be displayed on the screen. If you do not require all targets you choose the number of targets to display, from 1-100.

1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.

4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.

5. Choose THE NUMBER OF AIS TARGET and press the A: EDIT soft key.

6. Enter the number of AIS targets you wish to display and press the C: ENTER soft key.

7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

5-3

5. AIS OPERATION

Use the trackball to place the cursor on the sleeping AIS target (indicates only the presence of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location) you wish to activate; that is, know more about a vessel’s motion.

SOG and

COG vector

*1

Turning direction

Heading line*2

Activated target

*1: Vector shows STW (speed thru water) and CSE (course) when water tracking mode is selected at the radar.

*2: If there is no heading data, the line points in direction of COG.

5.5 Displaying Target Data

1. Place the cursor on an AIS target symbol.

2. Plotter display: Press the ENTER knob.

Radar display: Press D: TARGET INFO.

Activated target selected for data display

MMSI No.

Ship's Name

Course over Ground*, Speed over Ground#

CPA and TCPA

Bearing, Range

Beam, Length

MMSI 123456789

NAME QUEEN ELIZABETH

COG 359

°

SOG 23.2kt

CPA 2nm TCPA 12:35

BRG 359.4 RNG 10.8nm

BEAM 32m LENGTH 294m

* = CSE (course) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.

# = STW (speed thru water) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.

AIS target data display

5-4

5. AIS OPERATION

A target is declared a lost target when no data is received for three to five reporting intervals.

When this occurs, the target is marked with the (flashing) lost target symbol. However, the target which becomes a lost target is a activated target or a sleeping target within the lost target range.

Lost target

Confirming a lost target

1. Use the trackball to place the cursor where there is no ARPA target, marks or lines.

2. Push the ENTER knob.

5.7 Setting CPA and TCPA

When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range or its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm sounds, the messages CPA ALARM and TCPA ALARM appear, and the speaker icon appears (in red).

In addition, the AIS target plot symbol of the offending target changes to a triangle and flashes together with its vector. You may silence the audio alarm with the CLEAR key.

Press the ALARM key and the message “COLLISION ALARM” appears. Press the D:

CLEAR soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. The ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to

CPA (TCPA) of each track to own ship.

This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with own ship.

However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar controls are properly adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets effectively.

CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size, tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.

Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm range:

1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.

4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.

5. Choose CPA and then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.

5-5

5. AIS OPERATION

CPA

S

~

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

T

OFF

0.5nm

1nm

2nm

3nm

4nm

5nm

6nm

CPA window

6. Select a CPA limit desired from 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 3 nm, 5 nm and 6 nm with the

Trackball.

7. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

8. Choose TCPA.

9. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.

TCPA

S

~

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

T

30 seconds

1 minute

2 minutes

3 minutes

4 minutes

5 minutes

6 minutes

12 minutes

TCPA window

10. Select a TCPA limit from 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 6 min and 12 min.

11. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

12. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

The proximity alarm alerts when there are AIS targets within the range you set. When an

AIS target comes within the proximity alarm range, the message AIS TARGET COMES

CLOSE appears.

1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.

4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.

5. Choose PROXIMITY ALARM and push the ENTER knob.

6. Enter proximity alarm range (0.01-24 nm) and press the C: ENTER soft key.

7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

5-6

5. AIS OPERATION

5.9 Showing, Hiding AIS Target Tracks

AIS target tracks may be shown or hidden as follows

1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.

2. Use the Trackball to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.

3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.

4. Use the Trackball to select one of the following:

OFF (no ARP nor AIS): Turn off target tracks.

ON (ARP and AIS): Turn on target tracks

ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.

AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks.

BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

5.10 Choosing Vector Time

The vector is the line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed and course of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length (time) in order to evaluate the risk of collision with any target.

1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.

4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.

5. Choose VECTOR TIME and then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the AIS vector time window.

AIS VECTOR TIME

▲

~

{

{

{

{

{

▼

30 seconds

1 minute

3 minutes

6 minutes

15 minutes

30 minutes

AIS vector time window

6. Operate the Trackball to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min and 30 min.

7. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

5-7

5. AIS OPERATION

5.11 Displaying Past Positions of AIS Targets

You can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past positions of any

AIS targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the spacing between dots.

Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running

straight

(c) Ship reduced

speed

(d) Ship increased

speed

AIS past position displays

To turn the AIS past position display on or off:

1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.

4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.

5. Choose HISTORY INTERVAL and then press the A: EDIT soft key.

HISTORY INTERVAL

▲

~

{

{

{

{

▼

OFF

30 seconds

1 minute

3 minutes

6 minutes

History interval window

6. Operate the Trackball to select history interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min and 6 min, or select OFF to turn off the past position display.

7. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

5-8

6. DATA TRANSFER

This chapter provides information for saving and replaying data to and from memory cards, and receiving and outputting data through the network.

6.1 Memory Card Operations

The memory cards store these data: marks, lines, waypoints, routes, track, position, water temperature and setting data (plotter only). The following memory cards may be used:

Kingstone: SD-M64B1 (64 MB), SD-M128B1 (128 MB)

Viking: 32SD-M32B1 (32 MB), 64SD-M64B1 (64 MB)

EP Memory: 32 MB, 64 MB

SANDISK: 64SDSDB-64-J60 (64 MB), 128SDSDB-128-J60 (128 MB)

Panasonic: 64 RP-SD064BL1A (64 MB), 128RP-SD128BL1A (128 MB)

Toshiba: 64 SD-NAD064MT (64 MB), 128 SD-NA128MT (128 MB)

6.1.1 Deleting all data (other than chart data) from memory cards

Follow the procedure below to delete all data (other than chart data) from memory cards.

1. Insert a blank memory card into the card slot.

2. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, D: DATA

TRANSFER, A: SAVE/LOAD DATA and C: SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.

SAVE

DATA

TRACKS

MARKS & LINES

WAYPOINTS & ROUTES

SETTING DATA*

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

A

EDIT

B

SAVE

* = Plotter data only

D

DELETE

E

RETURN

Save data menu

3. Press the D: DELETE soft key. You are asked if you are ready to delete the contents of the memory card.

4. Push the ENTER knob to format (or press the CLEAR key to escape). “NOW

DELETING MEMORY CARD” appears. Do not remove the card while its contents are being deleted. When the formatting is completed, “DELETE COMPLETED. PUSH

ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears.

5. Push the ENTER knob to continue.

6-1

6. DATA TRANSFER

Note: If the memory card was not inserted correctly, the message “FAILED TO DELETE

MEMORY CARD.” appears.

6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card

1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot.

2. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, D: DATA

TRANSFER, A: SAVE/LOAD DATA and C: SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.

3. Use the Trackball to select item to save.

4. Press the A: EDIT soft key.

5. Use the Trackball to select ON.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.

7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to choose other data to save if desired.

8. Press the B: SAVE soft key, then press the ENTER knob. The message “NOW SAVING

DATA TO MEMORY CARD. DO NOT TURN OFF DISPLAY UNIT UNTIL

COMPLETED.” appears.

When saving is completed, “COMPLETED SAVING DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO

CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.

Memory card messages

Various memory card messages appear to alert you to memory card-related error. These are tabulated below.

Memory card messages

Message Reason

Memory card is not inserted. Please insert memory card. Push

ENTER knob to continue.

Memory card not inserted.

Remedy

Push the ENTER knob to return to the

SAVE DATA display and then insert card.

Overwrite data?

(Track)

(Mark)

(WPT)

(Config)

Failed to save data. Push

ENTER knob to continue.

Data type to be recorded exists on memory card. (Two or more of same type of data cannot be recorded.)

Push the ENTER knob to overwrite same data type on the card, or press the CLEAR key to escape.

Could not save data. Push the ENTER knob to continue.

6-2

6. DATA TRANSFER

6.1.3 Playing back data from a memory card

Data (track, marks, lines, waypoints, routes and setting data) can be loaded from a memory card and displayed on the screen. This feature is useful for observing past data and setting up the equipment for a specific purpose with “setting data.”

1. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and D: DATA

TRANSFER soft keys.

2. Press the A: SAVE/LOAD DATA soft key.

3. Press the A: LOAD DATA FROM MEMORY CARD soft key to show the LOAD DATA menu.

TRACKS OFF

MARKS & LINES OFF

WAYPOINTS & ROUTES OFF

SETTING DATA*

WALLPAPER

OFF

OFF

LOAD

DATA

A

EDIT

B

LOAD

* = Plotter data onl

E

RETURN

Load data menu

4. Use the Trackball to select item to load.

5. Press the A: EDIT soft key. (The A: EDIT soft key is inoperative when no memory card is inserted or there is no data in the memory card.)

6. Use the Trackball to select ON. (Select OFF not to load selected data.) Press the C:

ENTER soft key. If the memory card does not contain the item selected, the unit beeps and ON cannot be selected.

7. After selecting all items desired, press the B: LOAD soft key, then press the ENTER knob. The message “START LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.” appears.

8. After loading is completed, the message “COMPLETED LOADING DATA. PUSH

ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.

Notes on loading data

Tracks: Since loaded track data is added to internal track, oldest track will be erased when the track memory capacity is exceeded.

Waypoints & routes: The loaded data replaces like stored data.

Marks & lines: The loaded data is added to internal data. When the mark/line memory becomes full no marks may be entered.

Setting data: The loaded data replaces current configuration settings. If the memory card contents could not be loaded, push the ENTER knob to restart with default settings. Note that track memory capacity is not saved or loaded. To use loaded setting data, turn the power off and on again.

Wallpaper: Load desired wallpaper. (See Chapter 7.)

6-3

6. DATA TRANSFER

6.2 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment

You can receive waypoints, routes, marks and lines from NavNet equipment.

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the D: DATA TRANSFER soft key.

4. Press the C: RECEIVE DATA VIA NETWORK soft key.

HOST NAME PLOT1 - - -

MARKS & LINES OFF

WAYPOINTS & ROUTES OFF

RECEIVE

DATA

A

EDIT

B

RCV

E

RETURN

Receive data menu

5. Select HOST NAME, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

HOST NAME

▲

¤

¡

¡

¡

▼

1 (NAVNET1)

2 (NAVNET2)

3 (NAVNET3)

4 (NAVNET4)

Host name window

6. Use the Trackball to choose host name from which to receive data, then push the

ENTER knob.

7. Select the data you wish to receive, then press the A: EDIT soft key. For example, select

MARKS & LINES.

MARKS & LINES

▲

¡

¤

▼

ON

OFF

Marks & lines window

8. Select ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

9. Turn WAYPOINTS & ROUTES on or off as appropriate.

10. Press the B: RCV soft key followed by the ENTER knob. The message “START

RECEIVING DATA VIA NETWORK.” is displayed. If no data could be found, the message “(HOST NAME)’ IS NOT FOUND.” appears. When the transfer is completed, the message “DATA TRANSFER COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to finish.

11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

6-4

6. DATA TRANSFER

6.3 Outputting Data Through the Network

Follow the procedure below to output data through the network. To prevent trouble, do not output the same data from multiple sources.

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP, A: PORT SETUP and

D: OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK soft keys.

SELECT

SNTNC

A

ON/OFF

MTW

RMA

RMB

RMC

VHW

VTG

WPL

XTE

AAM

APB

BOD

BWR

DPT

GGA

GLL

GTD

ZDA

HDT

HDG

MWV

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

E

RETURN

Select sentence menu

3. Select sentence with the Trackball.

4. Press the A: ON/OFF soft key to turn sentence on or off.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

AAM: Waypoint arrival alarm

APB: Autopilot sentence B

BOD: Bearing origin to destination

BWR: Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line

DPT: Depth

GGA: Global positioning system(GPS) fix data

GLL: Geographic position - latutude/longitude

GTD: Own ship information-TD

MTW: Water temperature

RMA: Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data

RMB: Recommended minimum navigation information

RMC: Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data

VHW: Water speed and heading

VTG: Course over ground and ground speed

WPL: Waypoint location

XTE: Cross-track error, measured

ZDA: Time and date

HDT: Heading true,

HDG: Heading, deviation and variation

MWV: Wind speed and angle

6-5

6. DATA TRANSFER

This page intentionally left blank.

6-6

This chapter describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to suit your needs. For mode-specific menus, e.g. radar, plotter and sounder, make sure that you select the appropriate display when making changes or viewing menu options.

This paragraph shows you how to set up functions common to the plotter, radar and sounder displays. This is done on the GENERAL SETUP menu, which you may display from any mode. These items include language, key beep, units of measurement, data sources, etc.

1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.

KEY BEEP

LANGUAGE

RANGE UNIT

ON

ENGLISH nm, kt

TEMPERATURE UNIT

DEPTH UNIT

WIND UNIT

WIND DATA

SPEED AVERAGING

LOCAL TIME OFFSET

RESET TRIP LOG

°F ft ft

APPARENT

60 seconds

9H 0m

NO

TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING 15 sec

SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION SAVE SHIP

WALLPAPER

POSITION & MOB

DEFAULT

GENERAL

SETUP1

A

EDIT

B

DST

ON/OFF

C

AIS

OPTION

D

NEXT

PAGE

E

RETURN

LAT/LON DISPLAY

TD DISPLAY

SPEED SOG

DD°MM.MMMM'

LORAN C

POSITION DISPLAY

TIME DISPLAY

LAT/LON

24 HOURS

RANGE & BEARING MODE RHUMB LINE

BEARING READOUT

MAGNETIC VARIATION

AIR PRESSURE UNIT

MAGNETIC

AUTO 07.0

°Ε hPa

GENERAL

SETUP2

A

EDIT

E

PREV.

PAGE

Page 1

Page 2

General setup menu

4. Press the D: NEXT PAGE or E: PREV. PAGE soft key to switch pages if necessary.

5. Use the Trackball to select item.

6. Press the A: EDIT soft key.

7. Use the Trackball to select option desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

7-1

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Contents of general setup menu

Item Description

Key Beep

Language

Turns key beep on/off.

Chooses menu language.

Range Unit Chooses unit of range and speed measurement.

Temperature

Unit

Chooses unit of water temperature measurement.

Depth Unit

Wind Unit

Wind Data

Chooses unit of depth measurement.

Chooses unit of wind measurement.

Chooses how to display wind data.

Settings

On, Off

English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese,

Spanish, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm & yd, kt; nm & m, kt; km & m, km/h; sm & yd, mph

°C,°F

Speed

Averaging

Local Time

Offset

Calculation of ETA is based on average ship’s speed over a given period. If the period is too long or too short, calculation error will result. Change this setting if calculation error occurs. The default setting is suitable for most conditions.

Enter time difference between local time and UTC time to use local time.

Reset Trip Log Resets trip log.

Timeout

Display

Setting

Save MOB

Key Function

Sets number of seconds to show a window (for example, BRILL, GAIN) before it is erased from the screen.

Defines the function of the SAVE/MOB key.

-13:30 to +13:30. For multiple display unit configuration, all units should have the same time offset.

Yes, No

15 s, 30 s, 60 s, Continue (no timeout)

Wallpaper

Lat/Lon

Display

Chooses what to display in menu background.

Requirements for user wallpaper

Size: 252 KB or less, 640(H)x480(V)

Name: wallpaperh.png

No. of Colors: 256

Compression Level: None

Interlace: None

Permeation Color: None

Chooses how many digits (or seconds) to display after decimal point in latitude and longitude position. m, ft, fa, P/B (Passi/Braza)

Kt, km/h, MPH, m/s

Apparent: The wind felt aboard a moving vessel. It is the combination of the true wind and the boat wind. True: The true speed and direction of the wind, not modified by the effects of the boat's movement.

0-9999 seconds

Save Ship Position & MOB: Short press to save ship position, long press to save MOB.

MOB Without Confirmation: Position saved as MOB position without confirmation. This setting is only effective with automatic range selection and with waypoint marker displayed on radar display.

Quick Point Function: Position saved as quick point.

Default: Default wallpaper

User: User wallpaper. To use your own wallpaper, save Microsoft Photo Editor or

Adobe Photoshop created png image (see conditions at left) to SD card, load file to equipment (see Chapter 6) and then choose this User option.

DD°MM.MM’, DD°MM.MMM’,

DD°MM.MMMM’, DD°MM’SS.S”

(Con’t on next page)

7-2

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)

Item Description

TD Display

Speed

Position

Display

Time Display

Chooses type of TD to display.

Chooses speed format to display.

Chooses how to display position.

Examples of MGRS indications:

18S: Locating a point within the Grid

Zone Designation

18SUU: Locating a point within a

100,000-meter square

18SUU80: Locating a point within a

10,000-meter square

18SUU8401: Locating a point within a

1,000-meter square

18SUU836014: Locating a point within a 100-meter square

Chooses time notation.

Settings

Loran C, Decca

SOG (Speed over ground), STW (Speed through water)

Latitude, Longitude; Loran or

Decca TDs, or MGRS

(Military Grid Reference

System).

What is MGRS?

For convenience, the world is generally divided into 6

° by 8° geographic areas, each of which is given a unique identification, called the Grid Zone

Designation. These areas are covered by a pattern of 100,000-meter squares.

Each square is identified by two letters called tie 100,000-meter square identification. This identification is unique within the area covered by the Grid Zone

Designation. Exceptions to this general rule have been made in the post to preserve the 100,000-meter identifications on mapping that already exists.

A reference keyed to a gridded map of any scale is made by giving the 100,000- meter square identification together with the numerical location. Numerical references within the 100,000-mater square are given to the desired accuracy in terms of the easting (E) and northing

(N) grid coordinates for the point. The

Grid Zone Designation usually is prefixed to the identification when references are made in more than one grid zone designation area.

12 hours, 24 hours

(Con’t on next page)

7-3

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)

Item Description

Range &

Bearing

Mode

Bearing

Readout

Chooses how to calculate range and bearing.

Chooses bearing display format for course, course over ground and cursor bearing.

Magnetic

Variation

Air Pressure

Unit

AIS OPTION soft key

The magnetic variations for all areas of the earth are preprogrammed into this unit. The preprogrammed variation is accurate for most instances, however you may wish to manually enter a variation. For manual input, select

Manual, hit the A: EDIT soft key, enter value, then hit the C: ENTER soft key to set. “AUTO” requires position data.

Chooses unit of air pressure measurement.

See Chapter 5.

Settings

Great Circle: Shortest course between two points on the surface of the earth.

Rhumb Line: Straight line drawn between two points on a nautical chart.

True, Magnetic

Auto, Manual hPa, mbar, mmHg, inHg

This paragraph explains how to customize the radar display to suit your operational needs.

7.2.1 Radar display setup

The radar display may be set up from the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu, which contains items such as EBL reference and cursor position format.

1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.

2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.

EBL REFERENCE RELATIVE

CURSOR POSITION

TUNING

RNG & BRG-REL

AUTO

TX SECTOR BLANKING OFF 000 ° 001°

NOISE REJECTION OFF

BACKGROUND COLOR BLACK/GREEN

ECHO COLOR GREEN

2ND ECHO REJECTION OFF

WATCHMAN TIME 5 minutes

RANGE UNIT

TRAIL MODE nm

RELATIVE

DISPLAY

SETUP

A

EDIT

B

D. BOX

E

RETURN

Radar display setup menu

7-4

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Contents of radar display setup menu

Item Description

EBL

Reference

References EBL bearing, shown in the

EBL data box, to North (True) or heading (Relative). Relative with no heading input. True only in course-up, north-up and true motion.

Cursor

Position

Chooses how to display cursor position.

Note: “RNG & BRG-TRUE” requires heading data, true bearing. Reverts to relative bearing when heading data is lost.

Tuning

TX Sector

Blanking

Settings

True, Relative

LAT/LON: Lat/Long position of cursor

TD: Loran C or Decca TDs

RNG & BRG-REL: Range and bearing in relative bearing.

RNG & BRG-TRUE: Range and bearing in true bearing.

MGRS: MGRS format position

Selects receiver tuning method. For further details see the paragraph “2.3

Tuning.”

Auto, Manual

Turns on/off dead sector graphic, which shows area where no echoes are received. To set sector, select ON, then enter range. Max. sector is 135°.

Dashed lines mark the dead sector.

Note that noise may occasionally appear in the TX sector when the echo trail feature is turned on.

On, Off

Noise

Rejection

Dead sector

Electrical noise, appearing on the screen as “speckles,” may be suppressed with the noise rejector.

Note that some forms of interference cannot be suppressed.

(Con’t on next page)

Off, Low, High

7-5

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Contents of radar display setup menu (con’t from previous page)

Item Description

Background

Color

Echo Color

2ND Echo

Rejection

Watchman

Time

Chooses colors of background, range rings and characters.

Effective when C: HUE soft key is set for MANUAL SET.

Chooses echo color.

Settings

Black/Green

Background: Black

Rings: Green

Characters: Green

Black/Red

Background: Black

Rings: Green

Characters: Red

Blue/White

Background: Blue

Rings: White

Characters: White

DK Blue/White

Background: Dark Blue

Rings: Green

Characters: Red

White/Green

Background: White

Rings: Green

Characters: Green

Yellow, Green,

Multi-color. (Multi-color shows echoes in red, yellow or green in order of descending strength.)

On, Off Reduces second-trace echoes. See the paragraph “2.24 Suppressing

Second-trace Echoes.”

Sets watchman stand-by period.

For further details see the paragraph “ 2.23 Watchman.”

5, 10, 20 minutes

Range Unit Select unit of range measurement. nm, km, sm

Trail Mode Sets echo trail reference.

Note: Relative trail is available in all presentation modes except true motion. True trail is available in all modes.

True: Echo trails plotted in actual courses and speeds. Requires compass signal and speed input.

Relative: Echo trails move relative to own ship.

7-6

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

7.2.2 Radar range setup

You may choose the radar ranges you wish to use, from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.

After choosing the ranges desired, change the range with the RANGE key to activate range settings. Available ranges depends on the radar used.

At least two ranges must be turned on. When less than two ranges are turned on you cannot escape from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.

Note that this function is not available with the GD-1920C-BB.

1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.

2. Press the B: RADAR RANGE SETUP soft key to show the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.

4nm

6nm

8nm

12nm

16nm

24nm

36nm

48nm

64nm

72nm

0.125nm

0.25nm

0.5nm

0.75nm

1nm

1.5nm

2nm

3nm

MAXIMUM RANGE XXnm

*

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

RANGE

SETUP

A

ON/OFF

E

RETURN

6km

8km

12km

16km

24km

36km

48km

64km

72km

0.25km

0.5km

0.75km

1km

1.5km

2km

3km

4km

MAXIMUM RANGE XXkm

*

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

* = Max. range depends on network radar used and is set on the network radar at installation.

Range unit: nm Range unit: km

Radar range setup menu

3. Use the Trackball to select the range which you want to turn on or off.

4. Press the A: ON/OFF soft key to turn a range on or off as appropriate.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to register settings.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

RANGE

SETUP

A

ON/OFF

E

RETURN

1824C-BB

1834C-BB

1934C-BB

24 nm, km, sm

36 nm, km, sm

48 nm, km, sm

1944C-BB 64 nm, km, sm

1954C-BB, 1964C-BB 72 nm, km, sm

7-7

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default radar function key settings are as shown in the table below.

Function Key Default Function Function Key Label

1

2

3

4

Turn heading line off.

Turn range rings on/off.

HL

RNG

Turn echo trail on/off. TRL

Turn display offcenter on/off. OFC

5 STBY/TX TX

If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the D: FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.

Function key setting

Function key label

SOFT KEY 1

HL: HDG LINE OFF

SOFTKEY 2

RNG: RINGS ON/OFF

SOFT KEY 3

TRL: ECHO TRIAL

SOFT KEY 4

OFC: OFFCENTER

SOFT KEY 5

TX: STBY/TX

H

L

T

X

O

F

C

T

R

L

R

N

G

FUNC

KEY

A

EDIT

E

RETURN

Radar function key menu

3. Select the function key you want to program, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

SOFT KEY 1

OFF

HL: HDG LINE OFF

MOD: MODE

GAI: GAIN

SEA: A/C SEA

RAI: A/C RAIN

FTC: FTC

ES: ECHO STRETCH

PLS: PULSE LENGTH

ZOM: ZOOM

T

Scroll down

SOFT KEY 1

OFC: OFFCENTER

TRL: ECHO TRAIL

RNG: RINGS ON/OFF

TLL: TLL OUTPUT

ALM: GUARD ALARM

EBL: EBL

VRM: VRM

TTM: TTM ON/OFF

WMK: WPT ON/OFF

WTM: WATCHMAN

S

T

Scroll down

SOFT KEY 1

ACQ: ACQUISITION

TX: STBY/TX

RSR: SOURCE RADAR

DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF

CHG: CHANGE CNTRL

QP: QUICK POINT

MRK: MARK ENTRY

S

Radar function key options

4. Select function desired with the Trackball, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to register your selection.

5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

7-8

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Radar function keys

Menu Item Function

OFF

HL: HDG LINE OFF

MOD: MODE

GAI: GAIN

SEA: A/C SEA

RAI: A/C RAIN

FTC: FTC

ES: ECHO STRETCH

PLS: PULSE LENGTH

ZOM: ZOOM

OFC: OFFCENTER

TRL: ECHO TRAIL

RNG: RINGS ON/OFF

TLL: TLL OUTPUT

ALM: GUARD ALARM

EBL: EBL

VRM: VRM

TTM: TTM ON/OFF

Assigns no function.

Turns heading line off.

Selects presentation mode.

Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window.

Shows A/C SEA adjustment window.

Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window.

Displays FTC window. Available with Model 1700 series radar. Inoperative otherwise.

Turns echo stretch on/off.

Sets pulselength (long or short).

Turns zoom on/off.

Press to shift display center to cursor location.

Press again to turn shift off and return cursor to display center.

Starts/stops echo trails.

Turns range rings on/off.

Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to navigator.

Displays alarm soft keys.

Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2 with each press.

Switches control between VRM1 and VRM2 with each press.

Turns TTM (Tracked Target Message) display on/off.

Turns waypoint marker on/off.

ES

PLS

ZOM

OFC

TRL

RNG

TLL

ALM

EBL

VRM

TTM

WMK: WPT ON/OFF WMK

WTM: WATCHMAN

ACQ: ACQUISITION

TX: STBY/TX

RSR: RADAR SOURCE

DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF

CHG: CHANGE CNTRL

QP: QUICK POINT

Turns watchman on/off.

Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target.

(Requires ARP-equipped Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar.)

Toggles between standby and transmit

Selects source for radar picture.

Turns data boxes on/off.

Changes display control in combination display.

Sets quick point (for navigation).

WTM

ACQ

TX

RSR

DBX

CHG

QP

MRK: MARK ENTRY Enters the mark at the cursor position. MRK

Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.

Function Key

Label

—

HL

MOD

GAI

SEA

RAI

FTC

7-9

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

This paragraph provides the information necessary for setting up the plotter display.

options

Navigation options, for example, waypoint switching method, may be set on the PLOTTER

SETUP menu.

1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key open the main menu.

2. Press the B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key.

WAYPOINT SWITCHING ARRVL ALM CRCL

COURSE VECTOR LINE

SET GOTO METHOD

QP

1 POINT

INTERNAL

SAFE ROUTE CHECK

POPUP INFO

OFF

OFF

QPT/MARK SOFT KEY QUICK POINT

SHIP SHAPE BOAT(L)

PLOTTER

SETUP

A

EDIT

B

D. BOX

E

RETURN

Plotter setup menu

Contents of plotter setup menu

Waypoint Switching

Course Vector

Set GOTO Method

QP

Safe Route Check

(C-MAP only)

Popup Info

(C-Map only)

QPT/MARK SOFT

KEY

SHIP SHAPE

B: D. BOX (soft key)

Chooses waypoint switching method. See “switching waypoints” on page 3-45.

You may extend a line from the own ship position to show ship’s course. It may be a vector (length depends on ship’s speed) or a simple line (course bar).

Sets the method by which to navigate to a quick point. See

“3.10.1 Navigating to a quick point.”

Set “EXT WPT (RMB)” when a destination waypoint is displayed from a external navigation equipment.

The safe route check feature checks for interfering objects

(such as wrecks) within a route when creating or editing a route.

You may show the information for objects as below.

OFF: No information appears.

ALL ON: When the cursor is placed on anywhere on chart, the information for that location appears.

POINTS ON: When the cursor is placed on an object symbol, the information for it appears.

Chooses the function of the uppermost soft key on the plotter display between QUICK POINT and MARK ENTRY.

QUICK POINT: Enters the quick point at the cursor or own ship position.

MARK ENTRY: Enters the mark at the cursor or own ship position.

Chooses configuration for own ship marker.

Sets up data boxes. See paragraph 7.5.

Perpendicular, Arrvl

Alm Crcl, Manual

Line, Vector, Off

1 Point, 35 Points,

35 Pts/Port Service

EXT WPT (RMB),

Internal

On, Off

ALL ON, POINTS

ON, OFF

QUICK POINT,

MARK ENTRY

BOAT(L), BOAT(S),

CIRCLE, CROSS

7-10

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default plotter function key settings are as shown in the table below.

Function

Key

1

Default Function

Function Key Label

3

Start/stop recording/plotting own ship’s track. TRK

EML

Ruler (measure range and bearing between two points). RUL

ADD

ALP

If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the D: FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.

Function key setting

Function key label

SOFT KEY 1

TRK: TRACK ON/OFF

SOFT KEY 2

EML: EDIT MK/LINE

E

M

L

T

R

K

FUNC

KEY

A

EDIT

SOFT KEY 3

RUL: RULER

U

L

SOFT KEY 4

ADD: ADD NEW WPT

A

D

D

SOFT KEY 5

ALP: ALPHA LIST

A

L

P

E

RETURN

Plotter function key menu

3. Select the soft key you want to program, then press the A: EDIT soft key. A menu shows the functions available and the current selection is highlighted.

SOFT KEY 1

Scroll

OFF

ADD: ADD NEW WPT

MWP: MOVE WPT

RUL: RULER

GWP: GOTO WPT

GRT: GOTO ROUTE

EML: EDIT MK/LINE

TRK: TRACK ON/OFF

TTM: TTM ON/OFF

DTT: DEL TGT TRK

ALP: ALPHA LIST

LCL: LOCAL LIST

RTE: ROUTE LIST

DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF

CHG: CHANGE CNTRL

QP: QUICK POINT

MRK: MARK ENTRY

▲

Plotter function key options

7-11

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

4. Select function desired with the Trackball, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to register your selection.

5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

Plotter function keys

Menu Item

QP: QUICK POINT

Function

OFF

ADD: ADD NEW WPT

Assigns no function.

Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place cursor for waypoint location, then press function key.

MWP: MOVE WPT

RUL: RULER

GWP: GOTO WPT

GRT: GOTO ROUTE

EML: EDIT MK/LINE

TRK: TRACK ON/OFF

Moves selected waypoint to different position.

Select waypoint, press function key, select new position, then press the ENTER knob.

Measures range and bearing between two points.

Press D: START POINT soft key to change starting point if necessary. Range and bearing between two points appears at the top of the screen.

Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter waypoint name in window, then press the C:

ENTER soft key.

Specify route to follow. Enter route name in window, then press the C: ENTER soft key.

Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate soft key to access menu item.

Each press starts or stops recording/plotting own ship’s track.

Turns TTM (target track) display on/off. TTM: TTM ON/OFF

DTT: DEL TGT TRACK

ALP: ALPHA LIST

LCL: LOCAL LIST

RTE: ROUTE LIST

Erases all TTM track.

Displays waypoint alphanumeric list.

Displays waypoint local list.

Displays route list.

DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Shows/hides data boxes.

CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Changes control in combination screen.

Sets quick point (for navigation).

Function Key

Label

—

ADD

MWP

RUL

GWP

GRT

EML

TRK

TTM

DTT

ALP

LCL

RTE

DBX

CHG

QP

MRK: MARK ENTRY Enters the mark at the cursor position. MRK

Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.

7-12

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

This paragraph shows you how to setup digital charts, from offsetting chart position to turning chart attributes on or off.

In some instances position may be off by a few seconds. For example, the position of the ship is shown to be at sea while it is in fact moored at a pier. You can compensate for this error by offsetting chart position as shown in the procedure below.

1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and A: CHART OFFSET soft keys.

+

34

080

+

CHART

OFFSET

16.0nm

WP-002

FISH

BRIDGE

C

SET

OFFSET

D

RESET

OFFSET

E

RETURN

Plotter display, chart offset selected

2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the correct latitude and longitude position of own ship.

3. Press the C: SET OFFSET soft key.

4. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The “chart offset icon” ( ) appears at the top of the display.

To cancel chart offset, press the D: RESET OFFSET soft key at step 3 in the above procedure.

7-13

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

7.4.2 Navionics chart attributes

Navionics GOLD chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART CONFIG menu, which you may display as follows:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and A: CHART CONFIGURATION soft keys.

LAT/LON GRID

TEXT INFORMATION

WAYPOINTS

WAYPOINT NAMES

CHART BORDER LINES

LIGHT SECTOR INFO

GREEN

ON

LARGE

ON

ON

ON

CHART

CONFIG

A

EDIT

B

CNTOUR

LINE

OBJECT INFORMATION ALL ON

CHART DISPLAY DETAILED

NAVAIDS SYMBOL INTERNATIONAL

CAUTION & ROUTING DATAON

MARINE FEATURES

LAND FEATURES

ON

ON

CHART

CONFIG

A

EDIT

D

NEXT

PAGE

E

RETURN

E

PREV.

PAGE

Page 1 Page 2

Chart configuration menu (Navionics

)

Contents of chart configuration menu (Navionics)

Item Description Settings

Lat/Lon Grid Latitude and longitude grids Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue, white, Off

Text Information Geographic place, name On, Off

Waypoints

Waypoint Names

Chart Border Lines

Light Sector Info

Object Information

Chart Display

Navaids Symbol

Caution & Routing

Data

Waypoint size

Waypoint name

Border lines (indices)

Lighthouse viewing sector

Map data

Choose level of detail for map

Choose what kind of navaids symbols to display.

Turn caution and routing data on or off.

Large, Small, Off

On, Off

On, Off

On, Off

Off, All On (display area data for cursor-selected object), Points

On (display only point data for cursor-selected object)

Detailed, Simple

International, US

On, Off

(Con’t on next page)

7-14

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Contents of chart configuration menu (Navionics GOLD) (con’t from previous page)

Item Description Settings

Marine Features Turn marine features on or off. On, Off

Land Features Turn land features on or off.

CONTOUR LINE Soft key

On, Off

Spot Soundings

Safe Contour

Shading

Depth Contour

Turn water depth display on or off.

Paint areas in dark blue (default color) which are shallower than depth value set.

Display depth contours.

On, Off

2m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)

5 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)

10 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)

20 m or equivalent ft, fa or PB)

ALL: Display all depth contours

5 m: Display only 5 m* depth contours

10 m: Display only 10 m* depth contours.

20 m: Display only 20 m* depth contours

OFF: Turn off depth contours.

* Or equivalent ft, fa or PB.

7.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes

Displaying the CHART CONFIGURATION menu

C-MAP chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART CONFIGURATION menu:

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and C: CHART CONFIG soft keys.

CHART

CONFIG

CHART

CONFIG

PERSPECTIVE

DE-CLUTTER

CHART DISPLAY MODE

SAFETY STATUS

WAYPOINT

WAYPOINT NAME

NAMES

BUOYS NAME

NAV-AIDS

LIGHT SECTORS

ATTENTION AREAS

TIDES & CURRENTS

ON

ON

FULL

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

US

FLASHING

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

A

EDIT

B

DEPTH

D

PAGE

SEABED TYPE

PORTS & SERVICES

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

TRACKS & ROUTES PLOTTER/OVERLAY

UNDERWATER OBJECTS PLOTTER/OVERLAY

RIVERS & LAKES PLOTTER/OVERLAY

LAND FEATURES

LANDMARKS

LAT/LON GRID

CHART BOUNDARIES

MIXING

CHART LEVEL

VALUE-ADDED DATA

CAMERA ICON

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

AUTO

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

OFF

UNLOCk

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

PLOTTER OVERLAY

A

EDIT

B

DEPTH

D

PAGE

E

RETURN

Page 1

Chart configuration menu (C-MAP)

Page 2

7-15

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

CHART CONFIGURATION menu description

CHART CONFIGURATION menu description

Object Content

PERSPECTIVE Perspective display on/off

CHART DISPLAY

MODE

Choose chart display mode

SAFETY

STATUS*

1

WAYPOINT

WAYPOINT

NAME

NAMES

Safety status indication

Waypoints marks and waypoint names

Waypoint names

Text for land and sea areas

ON

OFF

OFF

FULL

SIMPLE

Turns perspective display on.

Turns perspective display off.

Removes overlapping objects from display.

Displays overlapping objects.

All chart attributes are displayed.

Some attributes such as SEABED

TYPE, TRACKS and ROUTES are displayed.

FISHING Setting for use in fishing.

LOW Only NAV AIDS and water depth are shown.

CUSTOM User chooses which chart attributes to turn on or off.

ON Safety status ON (See Safety Status

Indication on page 7-18 for description.)

OFF

PLOT/OVE

RLAY

PLOT

OFF

Safety status OFF

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Waypoint markers and waypoint names are turned off. Waypoint names are not displayed regardless if WAYPOINT

NAME (below) is set to ON.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays. PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

Shown on plotter display.

Waypoint names are turned off.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

BUOYS NAME

LIGHT

SECTORS

ATTENTION

AREAS

Name of buoys

Light sector

Attention areas

OFF Names are turned off.

PLOTTER

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Buoy names are turned off.

NOAA symbols are shown.

Complex object shown with single icon. US

SIMPLE

INT

INT

SIMPLE

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

International symbols are shown.

Complex object shown with single icon.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Navaids are turned off.

ON Light sectors displayed.

FLASHING Light sectors displayed and flashing.

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

PLOT

OFF

Shown on plotter display.

Attention areas are turned off.

(Con’t on next page)

7-16

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

CHART CONFIGURATION menu description (con’t from previous page)

Object Content

TIDES &

CURRENTS

Tidal station and current station

SEABED TYPE Seabed type

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Tidal station and current station are not shown. Tidal graph is also turned off.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

PORTS &

SERVICES

TRACKS &

ROUTES

Ports and services

Tracks and routes

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

Shown on plotter display.

Tidal station and current station are not shown. Tidal graph is also turned off.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Ports and services are not shown. Near

Service also not shown.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

UNDERWATER

OBJECTS

RIVERS &

LAKES

LAND

FEATURES

LAT/LON GRID

CHART

BOUNDARIES

Below-surface obstructions such as wrecks

Rivers and lakes

Land features

LANDMARKS Landmarks

Latitude and longitude grids

Chart boundary lines

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

ON

AUTO

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

PLOT

OFF

Shown on plotter display.

Tracks and routes are turned off.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Underwater objects are turned off.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Rivers and lakes are turned off.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Rivers and lakes are turned off.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Landmarks are turned off.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Shown on plotter display.

Latitude and longitude grids are turned off.

Shown on plotter and overlay displays.

Chart border lines are shown for the last four charts in a chart card on the plotter and overlay displays

Chart border lines show on plotter and overlay displays.

Chart border lines show on plotter display.

Chart boundaries are turned off.

MIXING Changes chart scale to fit whole chart on display

(Con’t on next page)

7-17

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

CHART CONFIGURATION menu description (con’t from previous page)

Object Content

CHART LEVEL Maintains current chart scale regardless of zoom setting

VALUE-

ADDED DATA

Show/hide the "Conservation

Area" for *Australian waters.

(*Contact Australian authorities for details.)

CAMERA ICON Show/hide camera icon, which is used to display an image from icon location. To display an image, choose camera icon

( ), push the ENTER knob and then press the IMAGE soft key.

LOCK

UNLOCK

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

Keeps current chart scale.

Chart scale may chosen freely.

Value-added data shown on plotter and overlay displays.

PLOTTER Value-added data shown on plotter display.

OFF Value-added data is disabled.

PLOTTER/

OVERLAY

Camera icon shown on plotter and overlay displays.

PLOTTER Camera icon shown on plotter display.

OFF Camera icon is disabled.

*

1

SAFETY STATUS INDICATION

The following indications are shown beneath the range indication to denote safety status:

NORMAL

BEST MAP

DATA OFF DE-CLUTTER DANGER

NORMAL (or U.ZOOM or O.ZOOM):

This indication appears to help you select a suitable chart scale.

NORMAL: Suitable chart scale is selected.

U.ZOOM: Chart scale is too small.

O.ZOOM: Chart scale is too large.

BEST MAP: Shown in red when the unsuitable chart scale is selected.

DATA OFF: Mixing levels can be turned on when the electronics chart coverage area does not provide enough coverage to completely fill the display screen. When the cursor or own ship mark is placed in the area with coverage, the chart data is shown as below.

On: The chart line in the area with no coverage is shown. This area is filled with dots.

Off: The area with no coverage is not shown (goes to white).

DECLUT.: For C-MAP MAX charts, symbols of low priority (ex. map symbols on land) can be automatically hidden to unclutter the screen when you change the scale. When the function is turned on, DECLUT. appears in red.

DANGERS: Shown in red when the GROUNDING alarm detects the high-risk object

(listed in the grounding report) when the GROUNDING alarm is turned on.

CAUTIONS: Shown in red when the GROUNDING alarm detects the low-risk object when the GROUNDING alarm is turned on.

7-18

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

B: DEPTH CONFIG soft key

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and C: CHART CONFIGURATION soft keys.

3. Press the B: DEPTH CONFIG soft key.

DEPTH

CONFIG

DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION

AUTO

DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY

SHOW FROM: 7 ft TO: 30 ft

DEPTH LINE & SPOT SOUNDINGS

DISPLAY MODES:

PLOTTER/OVERLAY

DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS DISP:

SHOW FROM: 00000 ft TO: 01000 ft

ROCKS BOTTOM TYPE DEPTH DISPLAY:

SHOW FROM: 00000 ft TO: 00030 ft

A

EDIT

E

RETURN

DEPTH CONFIG menu

DEPTH CONFIG menu description

DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION: Choose the display color depending on depth.

Setting Description

AUTO

Displays the chart in 32-color specified by C-MAP.

MANUAL Displays the chart in three colors, blue, light-blue and white. Areas for each color can be set at

DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY.

AUTO

NONE

Turns off depth area display.

DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY: Set the depth boundaries for shallow-medium and medium- deep depths when DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION is set to MANUAL. For example, setting 18 ft and 60 ft will show depths up to 18 ft in white, depths from 18 to 60 ft in light-blue and depths greater than 60 ft in blue. (Setting value: 7, 18, 30 and 60 m/ft/fa/pb,

Default setting: Shallow-Medium; 7, Medium-Deep; 30 ft)

7-19

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS DISPLAY MODES: Choose where to display depth contours, depth data etc.

Setting Description

PLOT/OVERLAY Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter and overlay displays.

PLOTTER Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter display.

PLOT/OVERLAY

OFF Turns off depth lines and soundings.

DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS DISP: Choose the depth range at which to show depth lines and soundings (depth contours, depth data, etc.)

Setting Setting Range Default Setting

SHOW FROM 0 m/ft/fa/pb

0-99999 m/ft/fa/pb

TO 1000 m/ft/fa/pb

ROCKS BOTTOM TYPE DEPTH DISPLAY: Choose range for rocks depth display.

Setting Setting Range Default Setting

SHOW FROM

TO

0-99999 m/ft/fa/pb

0 m/ft/fa/pb

30 m/ft/fa/pb

7-20

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

You may select the data to show in the data boxes for the plotter, radar and sounder displays. Six boxes may be displayed in case of small size data box and two for large size data box.

1. Display the radar, plotter or sounder display, whichever you want to set.

2. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.

3. Press one of the following sets of soft keys depending on the display selected at step 1.

Plotter mode: B: PLOTTER SETUP, B: D. BOX

Radar mode: A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP, B: D. BOX

Sounder mode: A: SOUNDER MENU, B: D. BOX

X

DATA BOX SIZE

POSITION

WAYPOINT

COG

SOG

STW

BEARING

RANGE

TIME TO GO

ETA

TEMPERATURE

DEPTH

TRIP LOG

DATE

TIME

WIND

HEADING

AIR TEMPERATURE

AIR PRESSURE

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

SMALL

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

DATA

BOX

A

EDIT

E RETURN

Data box menu

4. Use the Trackball to select an item, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

5. Select ON or OFF as desired.

6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection. Six items may be set to ON for small data boxes; two for large data boxes.

7. Repeat steps 4-6 to turn other items on or off.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

7-21

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

7.6 Hot Page Setup

Six user-arrangeable hot pages are provided for quick selection of desired display. If the default hot pages are not to your liking you may change them as shown below.

1. Press the MENU key followed by pressing the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C:

SYSTEM SETUP, C: HOT PAGE & NAV DISP SETUP and A: HOT PAGE SETUP soft keys in that order.

2. Use the Trackball to select the hot page number to set, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

The “SELECT SCREEN TYPE” window appears.

HOT PAGE 1

HOTPAGE

SETUP

HOT PAGE 2

HOT PAGE 3 3

SELECT SCREEN TYPE

FULL SCREEN

HOT PAGE 4 4

SPLIT x 2

HOT PAGE 5 5

SPLIT x 3

C

ENTER

HOT PAGE 6

E

CANCEL

Hot page setup menu

3. Use the Trackball to select screen type desired among FULL SCREEN, SPLIT X 2 and

SPLIT X 3 and push the ENTER knob.

4. For the full-screen display, rotate the ENTER knob to select screen desired, then press the ENTER knob. If you selected a split screen, for example, SPLIT X 3, the display now looks as in the figure below.

HOT PAGE 1

RADAR PLOTTER SOUNDER

Red cursor shows current screen selection

NAV DATA OVERLAY

Hot page setup menu, SPLIT X 3 screen, main screen selection

7-22

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

5. Rotate the ENTER knob to select a main screen, then press the ENTER knob. For example, select the radar display. Your choice is then shaded to show that is has been selected.

HOT PAGE 1

RADAR PLOTTER

SOUNDER

Sub screen

COMPASS HIGHWAY EXT VIDEO

Hot page setup menu, SPLIT X 3 screen, sub screen selection

6. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the screen to show at the top right 1/4 screen, then press the ENTER knob or the C: ENTER soft key.

7. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the screen to show at the bottom right 1/4 screen, then press ENTER knob or the C: ENTER soft key.

Note: The A: SELECT WINDOW soft key functions to select the window to process.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

This section provides the information necessary for selecting the type of navigator connected to your plotter.

The NAV SETUP menu mainly selects the source of nav data. For GPS receiver other than a FURUNO BB GPS receiver, speed averaging and local time offset (to use local time) are also available. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B:

NAV OPTION and A: NAV SOURCE SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.

NAV

SETUP1

AIR TEMPERATURE SOURCE

AIR PRESSURE SOURCE

FURUNO BB GPS

FURUNO BB GPS

NAV

SETUP2

POSITION SOURCE

SPEED(STW) SOURCE

TEMPERATURE SOURCE

DE`PTH SOURCE

STW CALIBRATION

TEMP CALIBRATION

DEPTH CALIBRATION

ALL

ETR

ETR

ETR

0%

+0.0

°

+0.0ft

F

WIND AVERAGING 5 minutes

WIND DIRECTION OFFSET P0.0

WIND SPEED CALIBRATION 00

WIND(MWV) SOURCE

°

F

°

FURUNO BB GPS

STW TEMP DEPTH

12.3 kt 56.3°F 99.5ft

WIND SPEED

1.2 kt

WIND DIR

131°

EDIT

NEXT

PAGE

RETURN

EDIT

PREV>

PAGE

Page 1 Page 2

7-23

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Contents of nav setup menu

Item Description

Position

Source

Chooses source of position data.

Note: When FURUNO BB GPS is selected, GGA, VTG and ZDA sentences are set to ON automatically.

Settings

FURUNO BB GPS: GPS receiver

GP-320B/330B, WS-200

GP: GPS navigator (via NETWORK or NMEA port)

LC: Loran C navigator (via

NETWORK or NMEA port)

ALL: Multiple navaid connection (via

NETWORK or NMEA port)

ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA Speed(STW)

Source

Temperature

Source

Chooses source of speed data

Chooses source of water temperature data.

Depth Source Chooses source of depth data.

STW

Calibration

Calibrates NMEA speed data. Enter amount in percentage.

Temp

Calibration

Depth

Calibration

Wind

Averaging

Calibrates NMEA temperature data. Enter offset to correct NMEA temperature data.

Calibrates NMEA depth data. Enter offset to correct NMEA depth data.

Enter a value to smooth wind speed/direction data. Ship’s bow is referenced to smooth wind vector movement.

Offsets wind direction data. Wind Direction

Offset

Wind Speed

Calibration

Wind(MWV)

Source

Air

Temperature

Source

Air Pressure

Source

Offsets NMEA wind speed data. Enter amount in percentage.

Chooses source of wind data. Select

FURUNO BB GPS to get wind data from

WS-200.

Chooses source of air temperature data.

Select FURUNO BB GPS to get air temperature data from WS-200.

Chooses source of air pressure data.

Select FURUNO BB GPS to get air pressure data from WS-200.

ETR, NMEA. Select ETR to show water temperature data fed from the network sounder.

ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA

-50 to +50%

-20.0°C to +20.0°C (or equivalent in °F)

-15.0 to +90.0 ft (or equivalent in m, fa or P/B)

1-600 s

S180°-P180°

-50 to +50%

FURUNO BB GPS; NMEA

FURUNO BB GPS; NMEA

FURUNO BB GPS; NMEA

7-24

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

7.7.2 FURUNO BB GPS receiver setup

The GPS SETUP menu sets up a FURUNO BB GPS receiver. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION and B:

GPS SENSOR SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.

GPS

SETUP

GEODETIC DATUM WGS-84

POSITION SMOOTHING 000 second (s)

SPD/CSE SMOOTHING 005 second (s)

LATITUDE OFFSET 0.000’N

LONGITUDE OFFSET 0.000’E

DISABLE SATELLITE - - - - - -

LATITUDE 45

°35.000’N

LONGITUDE 125

°00.000’W

ANTENNA HEIGHT 005 m

GPS FIX MODE 2D/3D

COLD START NO

A

EDIT

B

GPS

STATUS

C

WAAS

SET UP

E

RETURN

GPS setup menu

Contents of GPS setup menu

Item Description

Geodetic Datum Geodetic datum is a reference for geodetic survey measurements consisting of fixed latitude, longitude and azimuth values associated with a defined station of reference. You must have the correct geodetic datum selected in your plotter so that it will reference the correct point on the chart for a given latitude and longitude.

Although WGS-84 is now the world standard, other categories of charts still exist. Refer to Appendix for a full list of geodetic datum.

Settings

See Appendix for full list.

(Con’t on next page)

7-25

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)

Item Description

Position Smoothing When the DOP or receiving condition is unfavorable, the GPS fix may change greatly, even if the vessel is not moving.

This change can be reduced by smoothing the raw GPS fixes. A setting between 000 to 999 is available. The higher the setting the more smoothed the raw data. If the setting is too high, the response time required to show a change of latitude and longitude will be too long. This is especially noticeable if the vessel is moving fast. Increase the setting if the

GPS fix changes randomly.

Spd/Cse Smoothing

During position fixing, ship’s velocity

(speed and course) is directly measured by receiving GPS satellite signals. The raw velocity data may vary too much depending on receiving conditions and other factors. You can reduce this random variance by increasing the smoothing. The higher the smoothing setting, the more the raw data will be averaged. If this setting is high, the response to speed and course changes will slow. For no smoothing, enter all zeroes.

Latitude, Longitude

Offset

Offsets latitude position to further refine position accuracy.

Settings

0-999 seconds

0-999 seconds

0.001’S – 9.999’S

0.000’N – 9.999’N

0.001’E – 9.999’E

0.000’W – 9.999’W

(Con’t on next page)

7-26

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)

Item Description

Disable Satellite Every GPS satellite is broadcasting abnormal satellite number(s) in its

Almanac, which contains general orbital data about all GPS satellites, including those which are malfunctioning. Using this information, the GPS receiver automatically eliminates any malfunctioning satellite from the GPS satellite schedule. However, the Almanac sometimes may not contain this information. If you hear about a malfunctioning satellite from another source, you can disable it manually. Enter satellite number (two digits, max. 3 satellites),then press the C: ENTER soft key.

Latitude

Longitude

Sets initial latitude position after cold start.

Use the A: N < - -> S soft key to switch coordinate.

Sets initial longitude position after cold start. Use the A: W < - -> E soft key to switch coordinate.

Antenna Height

GPS Fix Mode

Enters the height of the GPS antenna unit above sea surface. For further details refer to the installation manual.

Chooses position fixing method: 2D (three satellites in view), 2D/3D (three or four satellites in view whichever is greater).

Cold Start

B: GPS STATUS

(soft key)

Clears the Almanac to receive the latest

Almanac.

Displays GPS satellite status display.

Requires a FURUNO BB GPS receiver or

GPS navigator outputting the data sentence GSA or GSV. For further details see the chapter on Maintenance.

Settings

Max. 3 satellites

—

—

0-999 m

2D, 2D/3D

No, Yes

7-27

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

WAAS SETUP

Press the C: WAAS SETUP soft key to show the WAAS SETUP display.

Note: This function requires GP-320B antenna.

Contents of WAAS SETUP menu

Item Description Settings

WAAS MODE Select ON to use the WAAS mode. On, Off

Auto, Manual WAAS SEARCH WAAS satellite can be searched automatically or manually. For manual search, enter appropriate WAAS satellite number.

WAAS ALARM

When the WAAS signal is lost, the audible alarm sounds with the visual message “NO

WAAS SIGNAL.”

On: Alarm continues to sound until the WAAS positioning mode is available again or the alarm is recognized by key operation.

Off: Alarm sounds three times.

CORRECTION

DATA SET

Selects the type of message for WAAS correction. Use “02 (default setting)” until the system becomes operational.

7.7.3 TD display setup

On, Off

00 to 27, 99

The TD SETUP menu sets which Loran C or Decca chain to use to display TD position.

(Connection of a Loran C or Decca navigator is not necessary to display TD position.)

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION and C: TD SETUP soft keys to display the TD SETUP menu.

TD

SETUP

GRI

LORAN-C

9940 11-27

U.S. WEST COAST

CORRECTION 1 +000.0

µ s

CORRECTION 2 +000.0

µ s

DECCA

CHAIN 01 R-G

S BALTIC

CORRECTION 1 +00.00 lane

CORRECTION 2 +00.00 lane

A

EDIT

E

RETURN

TD setup menu

7-28

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Displaying Loran C TDs

1. Select GRI, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the GRI & station pair window.

GRI & STATION PAIR

▲

9940

▼

11-27

U.S. WEST COAST

Loran GRI & station pair window

2. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select GRI code.

3. Roll the Trackball rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station pair.

GRI & STATION PAIR

9940

▲

11-27

▼

U.S. WEST COAST

Loran C GRI & station pair window

4. Adjust the Trackball vertically to select station pair.

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key to register your selection.

6. If necessary, you may enter a position offset to refine Loran C position accuracy. Select

(GRI) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the A: EDIT soft key. Enter correction value with the Trackball and alphanumeric keys. Use the A: +

< − −>

- soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the

ENTER knob.

7. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice.

8. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the D: NEXT PAGE soft key.

9. Select “LORAN C” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”

10. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

Displaying DECCA TDs

1. Select CHAIN, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the chain & station pair window.

CHAIN STATION PAIR

▲

01

▼

R-G

S BALTIC

Decca chain and station pair window

7-29

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

2. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select Decca chain number.

3. Roll the Trackball rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station pair.

CHAIN STATION PAIR

01

▲

R-G

▼

S BALTIC

Decca chain and station pair window

4. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select station pair (R: red, G: green and P: purple).

5. Press the C: ENTER soft key to register your selection.

6. If necessary, you may enter position offset to refine Decca position. Select (CHAIN)

CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the A: EDIT soft key. Enter correction value with the Trackball and alphanumeric keys. Use the A: +

< − −>

- soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob.

7. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice.

8. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the D: NEXT PAGE soft key.

9. Select “DECCA” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”

10. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.

7.8 Nav Data Display Setup

The nav data display shows various navigation data, fed from a navigator, network equipment, etc. You may select the data to display and where to display it as follows:

1. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP, C: HOT PAGE & NAV

DISP SETUP and B: NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.

NAV

DATA

1 POSITION

A

EDIT

2 WPT POS 3 SOG

4 STW 5 COG

6 BEARING 7 RANGE

8 DEPTH 9 TEMP

Nav data setup screen

E

RETURN

7-30

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

3. Use the Trackball to select a location.

4. Press the A: EDIT soft key. The following display appears.

DISPLAY DATA

POSITION

WPT POSITION

SOG

STW

COG

BEARING

RANGE

DEPTH

TEMPERATURE

LOG TRIP

TIME TO GO

ETA

DATE

TIME

WIND

Nav data setup window

5. Select the data to display, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to register your selection.

6. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.

This section shows you how to customize your network sounder to your liking. You can set fish alarm sensitivity, fine tune sensors, etc.

1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.

2. Press the B: SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP soft key.

FISH ALARM LEVEL

TRANSMISSION

TVG - HF

TVG - LF

ECHO OFFSET - HF

ECHO OFFSET - LF

BOTTOM LEVEL - HF

BOTTOM LEVEL - LF

KP PULSE

SMOOTHING

TLL OUTPUT

MEDIUM

ON

3

3

+00

+00

+000

+000

INTERNAL

SM3

ON

SYSTEM

SETUP 1

A

EDIT

B

SENSOR

SETUP

D

NEXT

PAGE

E

RETURN

STC - HF

STC - LF

FREQ. ADJ. - HF

FREQ. ADJ. - LF

TARGET ECHO

Page 1

00

00

+00.0%

+00.0%

NORMAL

SYSTEM

SETUP 2

A

EDIT

B

SENSOR

SETUP

E

PREV.

PAGE

Page 2 (when connected ETR-30N only)

Sounder system setup menu

7-31

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Sounder system setup menu description

Item Description

Fish Alarm

Level

Sets the fish alarm sensitivity; that is, the minimum echo strength which will trigger the fish alarms.

Settings

High: Orange and stronger echoes trigger the alarm.*

Medium: Yellow and stronger echoes trigger the alarm.*

Low: Green and stronger echoes trigger the alarm.*

* = 8-color display

Transmission Turns TX power on/off. On, Off

TVG

(HF,LF)

Echo Offset

(HF, LF)

Bottom Level

(HF, LF)

KP Pulse

Smoothing

TLL Output

TVG (Time Varied Gain) compensates for propagation attenuation of the ultrasonic waves. It does this by equalizing echo presentation so that fish schools of the same size appear in the same density in both shallow and deep waters. In addition, it reduces surface noise. Note that if the TVG level is set too high short range echoes may not be displayed.

If the on-screen echo level appears to be too weak or too strong and the level cannot be adjusted satisfactorily with the gain control, adjust echo offset to compensate for too weak or too strong echoes.

If the depth indication is unstable in automatic operation or the bottom echo cannot be displayed in reddish-brown by adjusting the gain control in manual operation, you may adjust the bottom echo level detection circuit, for both HF and LF, to stabilize the indication. Note that if the level is set too low weak echoes may be missed and if set too high the depth indication will not be displayed.

0-9

-50 - +50

-100 - +100

Selects source of keying pulse.

Internal, External (See installation manual.)

SM1-SM4, OFF Smoothes echoes to present stable display. The higher the setting the greater the smoothing.

Outputs current position to plotter where it is marked with TLL mark. Use soft key to output TLL.

ON, OFF

(Con’t on next page)

7-32

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Sounder system setup menu description (con’t from previous page)

STC (HF, LF)

(For ETR-30N only)

FREQ. ADJ.

(HF, LF) (For

ETR-30N only)

Item Description

Adjusts STC level for the high and low frequencies, and is useful for suppressing surface noise. The setting range is 0-10; the higher the setting the greater the extent of suppression. Setting 10 suppresses noise up to several meters. Turn off the STC when there is no noise on the screen, otherwise weak echoes may be missed.

0-10

Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic equipment on your boat may show itself on the display. You may suppress these type of interference by adjusting frequency.

-10 - +10 %

TARGET

ECHO

(For ETR-30N only)

B: SENSOR

SETUP soft key

(See next page.)

Sets fishing objective.

Normal for general fishing, Surface for detecting surface. Pulse repetition rate is higher than NORMAL on the specified transducer.

Offsets speed, depth and water temperature indications and speed of sound.

Settings

Normal, Surface

See next section for details.

7-33

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

The SENSOR SETUP menu lets you further refine speed, water temperature and depth data fed from the network sounder.

1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.

2. Press the B: SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP and B: SENSOR SETUP soft keys to show the SENSOR SETUP menu. The current ship’s speed, water temperature, depth and speed of sound are shown at the bottom of the menu.

SENSOR

SETUP

SPEED CALIBRATION + 00%

TEMP. CALIBRATION + 00

°F

DEPTH CALIBRATION + 00ft

ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION + 000m/s

A

EDIT

SPEED

12.3kt

DEPTH

125.0ft

TEMP

78.8

°F

ACSTC SPD

1500m/s

E

RETURN

Sensor setup menu

3. Select item to adjust, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to set appropriate value.

Speed and temperature calibrations: Enter plus or minus value. For example, if the water temperature readout is 77

°

F but the actual water temperature is 75

°

F, enter

–2(

°

F).

Depth calibration: If you desire the depth readout to show the distance between ship’s draft and bottom (rather than transducer and bottom), set ship’s draft here. Enter a plus or minus value.

Acoustic speed calibration: Sets the speed of sound used by the network sounder.

Normally no adjustment is required, however if echoes are returning too slow or too fast adjust the value as appropriate. This is only used if water salinity is at an extreme level.

Under normal circumstances, do not adjust.

Sensor setup menu settings

Item

Speed Calibration

Temperature Calibration

Setting range (for default)

-50 - +50%

-20°C - +20°C

*

Default Setting

0 (no offset)

0 (no offset)

Depth Calibration -15 - +90 ft 0 (no offset)

Acoustic Speed Calibration -500 - +500 m/s 0 (no offset)

*: -36°C to +36°C if temperature unit setting on the GENERAL SETUP menu is different between multiple Navnet units.

5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key.

7-34

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

7.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range

This paragraph shows you how to set custom ranges for basic range, zoom range (marker and bottom zoom) and bottom lock range. All default basic ranges are restored whenever the unit of depth measurement is changed. Therefore, change the depth unit before changing the basic ranges.

1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key to open the main menu.

2. Press the C: SOUNDER RANGE SETUP soft key to show the SOUNDER RANGE

SETUP menu.

RANGE 1

RANGE 2

RANGE 3

RANGE 4

15 ft

30 ft

60 ft

120 ft

RANGE 5 200 ft

RANGE 6 400 ft

RANGE 7

RANGE 8*

ZOOM RANGE

BOTTOM LOCK RANGE

1000 ft

4000 ft

30 ft

20 ft

RANGE

SETUP

A

EDIT

E

RETURN

Sounder range setup menu

3. Select the range to change, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

4. Rotate the Trackball or ENTER knob to set range desired, then press the E: RETURN soft key. For basic range, set depth from lowest to highest; a range cannot be higher than its succeeding neighbor.

5. Press the MENU key to finish.

Default basic ranges

Range

1

5 m

15 ft

3 fa

Range

2

10 m

30 ft

5 fa

Range

3

20 m

60 ft

10 fa

Range

4

Range

5

Range

6

Range

7

Range 8

ETR-6/10N ETR-30N

40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m

120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft

20 fa 40 fa 80 fa 150 fa 650 fa

1500 m

4500 ft

900 fa

3 P/B 5 P/B 10 P/B 30 P/B 50 P/B 100 P/B 200 P/B 700 P/B 900 P/B

Setting range (ETR-6/10N): 2 m –1200 m, 7 ft – 4000 ft, 2 fa – 650 fa, 1 P/B – 1000 P/B

Zoom range and bottom-lock ranges

Item Settings

Zoom Range 2 m – 120 m, 7 ft – 400 ft,

1 fa – 60 fa, 1 P/B – 70 P/B

Bottom-lock

Range

3 or 6 m, 10 or 20 ft, 2 or 3 fa, 2 or 3 P/B

10 m, 30 ft, 10 fa, 10 P/B

6 m, 20 ft, 3 fa, 3 P/B

7-35

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default sounder function key settings are as shown in the table below.

Function Key Default Function Function Key Label

1 Output current position. TLL

3 Erase weak signal. SLV

5 Set picture advancement speed.

PA

If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:

1. Show the sounder display.

2. Press the MENU key.

3. Press the D: FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.

Function key setting

Function key label

SOFT KEY 1

TLL: TLL OUTPUT

SOFTKEY 2

CLT: CLUTTER

C

T

T

L

L

FUNC

KEY KEY

A

EDIT

SOFT KEY 3

SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL

S

L

V

SOFT KEY 4

NL: NOISE LIMITER

N

L

SOFT KEY 5

PA: PICTURE ADV

P

A

E

RETURN

Sounder function key menu

4. Select the function key you want to program, then press the A: EDIT soft key.

SOFT KEY 1

SOFT KEY 1

▲

SOFT KEY 1

OFF

MOD: AUTO MODE

GHF: GAIN - HF

GLF: GAIN - LF

SFT: SHIFT

NL: NOISE LIMITER

CLT: CLUTTER

WMK: WHITE MARKER

HUE: HUE

SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL

▲

Scroll down

PA: PICTURE ADV

TG: TEMP. GRAPH

TVH: TVG - HF

TVL: TVG - LF

EOH: OFFSET - HF

EOL: OFFSET - LF

SMT: SMOOTHING

ZMR: ZOOM RANGE

BLR: B/L RANGE

TLL: TLL OUTPUT

▲

Scroll down

SSR: SNDR SOURCE

DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF

CHG: CHANGE CNTRL

SAV: SAVE SCREEN

QP: QUICK POINT

MRK: MARK ENTRY

▲

Sounder function key options

5. Select function desired with the Trackball, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to register your selection.

6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

7-36

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

Sounder function keys

Menu Item

OFF

MOD: AUTO MODE

GHF: GAIN – HF

GLF: GAIN – LF

Function

Assigns no function.

Display automatic mode selection window.

Function Key

Label

MOD

Displays high frequency gain adjustment window. GHF

Displays low frequency gain adjustment window. GLF

SFT: SHIFT

NL: NOISE LIMITER

Shifts range in manual operation.

Suppresses noise.

CLT: CLUTTER Suppresses clutter.

WMK: WHITE MARKER Sets white marker.

HUE: HUE

SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL

PA: PICTURE ADV

TG: TEMP. GRAPH

Sets hue.

Erases weak signals.

Sets picture advance speed.

Turns temperature graph on/off.

SFT

NL

CLT

WMK

HUE

SLV

PA

TG

TVH: TVG – HF

TVL: TVG – LF

EOH: OFFSET – HF

EOL: OFFSET -LF

SMT: SMOOTHING

ZMR: ZOOM RANGE

BLR: B/L RANGE

TLL: TLL OUTPUT

Sets TVG for high frequency

Sets TVG for low frequency.

Offsets echo strength for high frequency.

Offsets echo strength for low frequency.

Sets echo smoothing rate.

Sets zoom range.

Sets bottom lock range for bottom-lock display.

Outputs current position to plotter. Also inscribes line on sounder and registers position as a waypoint on plotter.

TVH

TVL

EOH

EOL

SMT

ZMR

BLR

TLL

SSR: SNDR SOURCE

DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF

Selects source for sounder data.

Turns data boxes on/off.

CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Switches control in combination display.

SAV: SAVE SCREEN Saves sounder picture to SD card.

QP: QUICK POINT Sets quick point (for navigation).

SSR

DBX

CHG

SAV

QP

MRK: MARK ENTRY Enters the mark at the own ship position. MRK

Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL, set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.

7-37

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT

7.10 Nav Graphic Display Setup

The nav graphic display (see paragraph 3.1.2) shows either the compass display or the wind angle display, together with depth and temperature graphs. You may choose which to display and setup the depth and temperature graphs as follows:

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP, C: HOT PAGE & NAV

DISP SETUP and C: NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.

GRAPHIC METER

DEPTH GRAPH UP~DATE

TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE

COMPASS

1S/DOT

1S/DOT

NAV

GRAPHIC

EDIT

RETURN

NAV GRAPHIC menu

3. Choose GRAPHIC METER and press the EDIT key.

GRAPHIC METER

▲

COMPASS

WIND ANGLE

▼

Graphic meter window

4. Choose COMPASS or WIND ANGLE as appropriate and press the C: ENTER soft key.

5. Choose DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE and press the A: EDIT soft key.

DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE

▲

0.5s./dot

1s/dot

2s/dot

4s/dot

▼

Depth graph up-date window

6. Choose desired update period/number of dots and press the C: ENTER soft key.

7. Set TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE similarly.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

7-38

8. MAINTENANCE,

TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good working order and remedying simple problems.

WARNING

Do not open the equipment.

Hazardous voltage which can cause electrical shock exists inside the equipment. Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment.

NOTE

Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant or contact spray to coating or plastic parts of the equipment.

Those items contain organic solvents that can damage coating and plastic parts, especially plastic connectors.

Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance program should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below.

Maintenance program

Check for tight connection.

Remedy

Tighten loosened connectors. Connectors of processor unit and control unit

Ground terminal Check for tight connection and corrosion.

Clean or replace ground wire as necessary.

8-1

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Battery on circuit board

A lithium battery (Type CR2450-F2 ST2L, Code No. 000-144-941) fitted on a circuit board inside the processor unit preserves data when the equipment is turned off, and its life is about three years. When its voltage is low the battery icon ( ) appears at the top of the display. When the icon appears, contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery.

WARNING

Ensure battery polarity is correct.

Wrong polarity may cause the batteries to explode.

The fuse on the power cable protects the equipment from reverse polarity of the ship’s mains and equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out the cause before replacing it. Use the correct fuse. Using the wrong fuse will damage the equipment and void the warranty.

1824C-BB, 1834C-BB: 7A for 12V device, 3A for 24V device

1934C-BB , 1944C-BB: 15A for 12V device, 7A for 24V device

1954C-BB, 1964C-BB, GD-1920C-BB: 3A for 12/24 V device

1954C-BB/1964C-BB’s Power Supply Unit PSU-005: 15A for 12V device, 7A for 24V device

WARNING

Use the proper fuse.

Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage to the equipment or cause fire.

8-2

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

When the magnetron has expired, distant targets cannot be seen on the display. When you feel that long range performance has decreased, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement of the magnetron.

Radar model and magnetron used

Model Magnetron No.

MODEL 1824C-BB

MODEL 1834C-BB

E3588 000-146-866

E3571 000-146-867

MODEL 1934C-BB

MG4004 000-158-895

MODEL 1944C-BB

MAF1421B 000-158-786-10

MAF1422B

000-146-871

000-158-788-10

MODEL 1954C-BB

MG4006 000-158-896

MAF1425B 000-158-790-10

MODEL 1964C-BB M1458F 000-158-780-10

8.5 Replacing the Synchro Belt (1824C-BB only)

When the synchro belt of MODEL1824C-BB has worn out, the sweep is not synchronized with antenna rotation, which results in an abnormal picture.

When you suspect that the synchro belt has worn out, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement. (Type: 40 S2M 266UG, Code No.: 000-808-743)

If the cursor skips or moves abnormally, you may need to clean the Trackball.

1. Turn the retainer ring counterclockwise 45° to unlock it.

2. Remove the retainer ring and ball.

3. Clean the ball with a soft lint-free cloth, and then blow carefully into the

ABC

1

JKL

4

STU

7

_'#

0

GHI

3

PQR

6

Retainer Ring ball-cage to dislodge dust and lint.

4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers using a cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol.

5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.

6. Replace the ball and retainer ring. Be sure the retainer ring is not inserted reversely.

Note: Trackball maintenance parts are available as below.

Retainer ring and ball MU3721 000-144-645

8-3

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified technician.

8.7.1 General

General troubleshooting

If… Then…

you cannot turn on the

• check for blown fuse. power

• check that the power connector is firmly fastened.

• check for corrosion on the power cable connector.

• check for damaged power cable.

• check battery for proper voltage output (10.8 to 31.2 V). there is no response

• turn off and on the power. If there still is no response the key may when a key is pressed be faulty. Request service.

8.7.2 Radar

GD-1920C

-BB requires a network radar.

Radar troubleshooting

If… But… Then…

you pressed the POWER/TX nothing appears on the

• check that the antenna cable is key and the C: RADAR TX soft key to show the radar display firmly fastened.

• check if radar source is correct.

picture marks, legends appear no echo appears

•

check that the antenna cable the picture is not updated or it freezes

— is firmly fastened.

• check antenna cable.

• for freeze up, turn the processor unit on and off tuning is adjusted the range is changed sensitivity is poor radar picture does not change

— again.

• magnetron may need to be replaced. Contact your dealer.

• try to hit the [+] and [-] keys

• again. turn the processor unit on and off again.

• adjust A/C SEA. there is poor discrimination in range the true motion presentation is not working properly the range rings are not displayed

—

—

•

• reselect true motion mode. check if heading and speed are input.

• hit the B: RADAR DISPLY and

C: RINGS soft keys to display them.

8-4

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

8.7.3 Plotter

Requires a FURUNO BB GPS receiver.

Plotter troubleshooting

If… Then…

position is not fixed within three minutes position is wrong

• check that antenna connector is firmly fastened.

• check number of satellites received, on the GPS status display. (See page 8-12.) There should be three or more.

• check that the correct geodetic chart system is selected, on the GPS

SENSOR SETTINGS menu.

• enter position offset, on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu. the track is not plotted

• track is not being plotted. (“H” icon appears at the top of the display.)

Press the B: TRACK HALT soft key on the TRACKS & MARKS

CONTROL menu to start plotting again. the bearing is wrong

Loran C (or Decca)

TDs do not appear

Loran C (or Decca)

TDs are wrong

• check that correct magnetic variation is entered, on the GENERAL

SETUP menu.

• check that LORAN C (or DECCA) is selected at TD DISPLAY on the

GENERAL SETUP menu. Also, check that proper Loran C (Decca) chains codes are entered, on the TD SETUP menu.

• enter TD offset, on the TD SETUP menu. the ship’s speed indication is not zero after the ship is stopped

• try to decrease speed/course smoothing, on the GPS SENSOR

SETTINGS menu.

8-5

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

8.7.4 Sounder

Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N.

Sounder troubleshooting

If… But… Then…

you selected a sounder display with the DISP key picture does not appear

• check that the network sounder’s signal cable is firmly fastened.

•

Check that sounder source is marks and characters appear picture does not appear correct.

• check that the network sounder is plugged in. The LED on the network sounder should flash every second.

• check for loosened transducer connector. the picture appears the depth indication is not displayed noise or interference shows on the display the water temperature graph appears zero line does not appear picture sensitivity is too low —

—

— data is wrong

• the picture is shifted. Confirm shift setting.

• check gain setting, if using manual operation.

• marine life or air bubbles may be clinging to transducer face.

• bottom may be too soft to return a suitable echo.

• adjust gain and range to display the bottom echo (in reddish brown), if you are using the manual sounder mode.

• check to be sure the transducer cable is not near ship’s engine.

• check the ground.

• other video sounders of the same frequency as yours may be operating near you.

• check that sensor cable is tightly fastened.

8-6

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

8.8 Diagnostics

This paragraph provides the procedures for testing the equipment for proper operation.

Four tests are provided: Memory I/O test, Keyboard test, Remote controller test, and Test pattern.

8.8.1 Memory I/O test

The memory I/O test provides for individual testing of the processor unit, control unit,

FURUNO BB GPS receiver, Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N and ARP, displaying program number and checking for proper operation.

1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.

4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.

5. Press the A: MEMORY I/O TEST soft key.

MEMORY

I/O TST

DISPLAY UNIT TEST

GPS SENSOR TEST*

NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**

ARP TEST***

RETURN

* = Requires a FURUNO BB GPS Receiver.

** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N.

*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model

18x4/19x4 series network radar.

MEMORY I/O TEST menu

7. Then, press appropriate soft key to start a diagnostic test.

8-7

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Processor unit test

Press the A: PROCESSOR UNIT TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the processor unit. The equipment displays program version number and checks devices.

Results for device checks are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service.

A test connector is required to check ports. “ - - “ shown when no test connector is connected. Chart number shown when chart is inserted. Press the E: RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.

No results appear when

"sub" radar selected as radar source.

* = For NAVIONICS model. 1950026 XX.XX for C-MAP model.

Program No. 1950025 XX.XX*

ROM1 : OK

ROM2 : OK

SDRAM : OK

SRAM : OK

INT. BATTERY : OK

PORT

NMEA IN/OUT 1 : - -

NMEA IN/OUT 2 : - -

RS232 : OK

HEADING : 352.2

°

NETWORK : - -

CARD SLOT :

FPGA No. :

Program No. 1950025 XX.XX*

ROM1 : OK

ROM2 : OK

SDRAM : OK

SRAM : OK

INT. BATTERY : OK

PORT

NMEA IN/OUT 1 : - -

NMEA IN/OUT 2 : - -

RS232 : OK

HEADING : 352.2

°

NETWORK : - -

FPGA No. :

HEADING PULSE : OK

BEARING PULSE : OK (XX.Xrpm)

TOTAL ON TIME : 000000.0 h

TOTAL TX TIME : 000000.0 h

Machine Status +130

Machine Status +130

XX.XX* = Program Version No.

XX.XX* = Program Version No.

Model 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB Series GD-1920C-BB

Processor unit test results

GPS sensor test (Requires a FURUNO BB GPS receiver)

Press the B: GPS SENSOR TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the

FURUNO BB GPS Receiver. The equipment displays GPS receiver program version number, and checks the GPS unit for proper operation, displaying OK or NG (No Good) as the result. For NG, request service. Press the E: RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY

I/O TEST menu.

PROGRAM No. *XXXXXXXX0XX

GPS UNIT : OK

Machine Status +115

*: Program No.

GPS receiver test results

8-8

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Network sounder test (Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N)

Press the C: NETWORK SOUNDER TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N. The equipment displays network sounder program version number, checks the ROM and RAM, and displays water temperature

(appropriate sensor required) and depth. The results of the ROM and RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the E: RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.

PROGRAM No. 02523060XX

ROM 1 : OK

RAM : OK

TEMPERATURE: 65.61

°F

DEPTH : 100ft

Machine Status +115

XX = Program Version No.

ETR-30N: 0252310XX.XX

Network sounder test results

ARP test (Requires ARP pcb in Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar)

The ARP test is mainly provided for the service technician. Press the D: ARP TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the ARP. The results of the ROM and RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the E: RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.

PROGRAM No. 1859127XXX

ARP ROM : OK

ARP RAM

SPEED

COURSE

TRIGGER

VIDEO

: OK

: OK 12.3kt

: OK 359.9

°

: OK

: OK

BP

HP

MIN-HIT

SCAN-TIME

MAN-ACQ

AUTO ACQ

FE-DATA1

FE-DATA2

: OK

: OK

: 0003

: 0250

: 00

: 00

: 000

: 000

Machine Status +115

XXX = Program Version No.

ARP test results

8-9

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

The test pattern test checks the display for proper display of colors.

1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.

4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.

5. Press the C: TEST PATTERN soft key to show the test pattern.

6. Push the ENTER knob consecutively to show white, red, green, blue and black colors individually.

7. Press the E: RETURN soft key.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

BLACK

BLUE

GREEN

GREEN

RED

E

RETURN

[ENTER] knob

WHT

[ENTER] knob

RED

[ENTER] knob

GRN

BLU

[ENTER] knob

[ENTER] knob

BLK

[ENTER] knob

Test pattern sequence

8-10

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

The keyboard test checks the controls on the control unit for proper operation.

1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.

4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.

5. Press the B: KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST soft key.

PROGRAM No. 0359203-03.01

ROM :OK

ROM :OK

Screen for testing keyboard

6. Operate each control on the keyboard one by one. A key is functioning properly if its on-screen location “fills” in black when the key is pressed. For the ENTER knob and

Trackball, rotate them to show their X-Y positions digitally, and push the ENTER knob to confirm its function. Their ranges are –999 to +999.

7. Press the CLEAR key three times on the control unit to escape from the test.

8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

8-11

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

The GPS status display provides data about the GPS satellites. It is available with connection of the FURUNO BB GPS Receiver or a GPS navigator outputting the data sentence GSA or GSV.

1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION and B: GPS SENSOR

SETTINGS soft keys to display the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.

3. Press the B: GPS STATUS soft key.

DOP value

Date and

Time

WAAS satellite

("W")

23:59:59

APR 10 2009

DOP

ALT

W

N

12

23

W

29

20

01

21

05

27

30

17

26

28

S

E

SAT

No.

23

12

30

26

05

20

21

29

27

01

17

30

28

123

1.2

1 m

SNR

40 50

GPS 3D

E

RETURN

GPS position fix

GPS antenna height

RX signal level table

Bars show satellite signal levels. Satellites whose signal level extends past 40 are used to fix position.

WAAS satellite

(three digits)

Satellite position diagram

Satellites used for fixing position are circled.

GPS status display

4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to quit the GPS status display.

About the GPS status display

• This display is available with a FURUNO BB GPS receiver or other GPS receiver connected via LAN and outputting NMEA 0183 data.

• The receive signal level table shows the receive signal strength of 12 GPS satellites and one WAAS satellite. (GSA, GSV sentence necessary for GP-330B, WS-200 and other

GPS receiver.)

• The WAAS satellite whose GSA data is first received, in case of the GP-330B, WS-200 and other GPS receiver, is used for the display. When there is no GSA sentence and the

GSV sentence contains data from several WAAS satellites, the WAAS satellite having the highest elevation and best SNR is used for the display.

• The satellite position diagram shows the arrangement of GPS, GLONASS and WAAS satellites in the sky. A total of 36 satellites can be displayed. The type of satellite and number of satellites that can be displayed are as follows:

GPS, 1-36; GLONASS, 65-96, WAAS, 1

• ALT indication is only available with GP-320B.

8-12

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

8.10 Clearing Memories

Your equipment has a memory for each of the plotter, radar and sounder sections. These memories can be cleared to restart operation with default settings.

The following data are not cleared:

Radar: Heading adjustment, timing adjustment, MBS level, tuning point, tuning indication

(short, medium, long), video level, dead sector, antenna height, STC curve, antenna type, on time, tx time, Sounder: White marker, hue, signal level, TLL output, depth calibration, range.

1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.

3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.

4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.

5. Press the D: MEMORY CLEAR soft key.

PROCESSOR UNIT NO

GPS SENSOR NO

NETWORK SOUNDER NO

MEMORY

CLEAR

A

EDIT

E

RETURN

Memory clear menu

6. Use the Trackball to choose the memory to clear.

7. Press the A: EDIT soft key.

8. Use the Trackball to select YES, then press the C: ENTER soft key. One of the following displays appears depending on the selection made at step 6.

ALL SETTNGS EXCEPT

SNDR ARE RESET TO

DEFAULT. ARE YOU SURE?

YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB

NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY

BEGIN COLD START

TO CLEAR GPS

MEMORY. ARE YOU SURE?

YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB

NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY

SOUNDER WILL BE

SET TO DEFAULT.

ARE YOU SURE?

YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB

NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY

Processor Unit Clear GPS Receiver Clear Network Sounder Clear

Windows for clearing memory

9. Push the ENTER knob to clear the memory selected.

10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.

11. Turn the power off and on again.

Note: The message “SYSTEM HAS FAILED START UP TEST. PLEASE CONTACT A

LOCAL FURUNO REPRESENTATIVE FOR REPAIR. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” may appear when powering on the processor unit immediately after clearing any memory. It is not an indication of malfunction. Press any key to continue operation.

8-13

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

8.11 Error Messages

In addition to alarm messages your equipment also displays error messages.

Error messages

Error Message

• General

Meaning Remedy

Connection with the control unit was cut

Connection with the ETR was cut.

Connection with the RADAR was cut.

Low Voltage! Internal Battery

No bearing pulse detected.

No position data.

No GPS fix!

No heading pulse detected.

HEADING DATA MISSING!

Control unit disconnected

• Check the cable between the processor unit and control unit.

Network sounder disconnected.

• Check that processor unit

Radar disconnected. where the sounder is connected is turned on.

• Check network sounder’s cabling.

• Check that processor unit where the radar is connected is turned on.

• Check antenna cable.

Voltage of battery on circuit board in processor unit is low.

Have a qualified technician replace the battery.

No bearing pulse from radar antenna.

GPS navigator is turned off or no GPS position data.

Check antenna cable.

Possible trouble with

FURUNO BB GPS receiver.

No heading pulse

There may be obstacles around GPS antenna.

Disconnect GPS cable from the processor unit, and then contact your dealer.

Check heading sensor.

Check heading cable.

8-14

APPENDIX

Menu Overview

Radar

MENU Key RADAR

DISPLAY

SETUP

EBL REFERENCE (TRUE, RELATIVE)

CURSOR POSITION (LAT/LON, TD, RNG&BRG-REL, RNG&BRG-TRUE, MGRS)

TUNING (AUTO, MAN)

TX SECTOR BLANKING (ON (FROM 000 °, SECTOR 001°), OFF)

NOISE REJECTION (OFF, LOW, HIGH)

BACKGROUND COLOR (BLACK/GREEN, BLACK/RED, BLUE/WHITE,

DK BLUE/WHITE, WHITE/GREEN)

ECHO COLOR (YELLOW, GREEN, MULTI-COLOR)

2ND ECHO REJECTION (ON, OFF)

WATCHMAN TIME (5, 10, 20 minutes)

RANGE UNIT (nm, km, sm)

TRAIL MODE (TRUE, RELATIVE)

D. BOX soft key

(DATABOX SIZE SMALL/LARGE, POSITION, WAYPOINT, COG, SOG, STW,

BEARING, RANGE, TIME TO GO, ETA, TEMPERATURE, DEPTH, TRIP LOG,

RADAR

RANGE

SETUP#

DATE, TIME, WIND, HEADING, AIR TEMPERATURE, AIR PRESSURE)

0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/

6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (nm & sm)

0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (km)

# = Not used on GD-1920C.

Max. range

24 nm/sm, km = 1824C

36 nm/sm, km = 1834C

48 nm/sm, km = 1934C

64 nm/sm, km = 1944C

72 nm/sm, km = 1954C,

1964C

ARP SETUP

(Requires ARP circuit board in network radar

18X4C/19X4C.)

ARP TARGET INFO (INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP, OFF)

CANCEL ALL TARGETS (YES, NO)

ARP VECTOR MODE (RELATIVE, TRUE)

ARP VECTOR TIME (30 seconds; 1, 3, 6, 15, 30 minutes)

HISTORY INTERVAL (OFF, 30 seconds; 1, 3, 6 minutes)

CPA (OFF, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 nm)

TCPA (30 seconds; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12 minutes)

AUTO ACQUISITION AREA (ON, OFF)

TARGET ID NUMBER (ON, OFF)

1

FUNCTION

KEY SETUP*

SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5

(OFF, HDG LINE OFF, MODE, GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, FTC

(Model 17X4C series radar only), ECHO STRETCH, PULSE

LENGTH, ZOOM, OFFCENTER, ECHO TRAIL, RINGS ON/OFF,

TLL OUTPUT, GUARD ALARM, EBL, VRM, TTM ON/OFF, WPT

ON/OFF, WATCHMAN, ACQUISITION (ARP-equipped Model

18X4C/19X4C series network radar only), STBY/TX, RADAR

SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT,

MARK ENTRY)

* Default settings for function keys:

SOFT KEY 1, HDG LINE OFF; SOFT KEY 2, RINGS ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 3, ECHO TRAIL;

SOFT KEY 4, OFFCENTER, SOFT KEY 5, STBY/TX

AP-1

APPENDIX

1

SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION

2

GENERAL

SETUP

Page 1

NAV

Page 2

OPTION

KEY BEEP (ON, OFF)

LANGUAGE (ENGLISH, OTHERS)

RANGE UNIT

(nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm&yd, kt; nm&m, kt; km&m, km/h; sm&yd, mph)

TEMPERATURE UNIT ( °C, °F)

DEPTH UNIT (m, ft, fa, PB)

WIND UNIT (kt, km/h, MPH, m/s)

WIND DATA (APPARENT, TRUE)

SPEED AVERAGING (0-9999 seconds)

LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:30 - +13:30)

RESET TRIP LOG (YES, NO)

TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING (15, 30, 60 seconds, CONTINUE)

SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION (SAVE SHIP POSITION & MOB,

MOB WITHOUT CONFIRMATION, QUICK POINT FUNCTION)

WALLPAPER (DEFAULT, USER)

LAT/LON DISPLAY

(DD ° MM. MM'

DD ° MM. MMM'

DD ° MM. MMMM'

DD

° MM' SS.S")

TD DISPLAY (LORAN C, DECCA)

SPEED (SOG, STW)

POSITION DISPLAY (LAT/LON, TD, MGRS)

TIME DISPLAY (12 HOURS, 24 HOURS)

RANGE & BEARING MODE

(GREAT CIRCLE, RHUMB LINE)

BEARING READOUT (TRUE, MAGNETIC)

MAGNETIC VARIATION (AUTO, MANUAL)

AIR PRESSURE UNIT (hPa, mbar, mmHg, inHg)

NAV

SOURCE

SETTINGS

POSITION SOURCE

(FURUNO BB GPS, GP, LC, ALL)

SPEED(STW) SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)

TEMPERATURE SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)

DEPTH SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)

STW CALIBRATION (-50 - +50 %)

TEMP CALIBRATION (-40 ° - +40°F)

DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +90 ft)

WIND AVERAGING (1 - 600 seconds)

WIND DIRECTION OFFSET (S(P)0 ° - 180°)

WIND SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%)

WIND(MWV) SOURCE (FURUNO BB GPS, NMEA)

AIR TEMPERATURE SOURCE (FURUNO BB GPS, NMEA)

AIR PRESSURE SOURCE (FURUNO BB GPS, NMEA)

GPS

SENSOR

SETTINGS

GEODETIC DATUM (WGS-84, OTHERS: See page AP-10.)

POSITION SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds)

SPD/CSE SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds)

LATITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999'N(S))

LONGITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999'W(E))

DISABLE SATELLITE (Max. 3)

LATITUDE (45 °35.000'N)

LONGITUDE (125

°00.000'W)

ANTENNA HEIGHT (0 - 999 m)

GPS FIX MODE (2D, 2D/3D)

COLD START (YES, NO)

WAAS MODE (ON, OFF)

GPS STATUS soft key

(Displays status of GPS satellites.)

WAAS SEARCH (AUTO, MANUAL)

WAAS ALARM (ON, OFF)

CORRECTIONS DATA SET

WAAS SETUP soft key

(FURUNO BB GPS receiver required.)

TD SETUP

LORAN-C GRI (All Loran C GRIs)

CORRECTION 1 (-999.9 - +999.9 μs)

CORRECTION 2 (-999.9 - +999.9 μs)

DECCA CHAIN (All Decca chains)

CORRECTION 1 (-99.99 - +99.99 lane)

CORRECTION 2 (-99.99 - +99.99 lane)

AP-2

APPENDIX

2

SYSTEM

SETUP

4

3

PORT

SETUP

DATA 1:

GPS/NMEA

PORT

DATA 2:

NMEA PORT

OUTPUT FORMAT

(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)

LAT/LON FORMAT

(DD ° MM. MM'

DD

° MM. MMM'

DD ° MM. MMMM')

XTE FORMAT (X.XX, X.XXX)

OUTPUT DESTINATION

(YES, NO)

SELECT SNTNC soft key*

PORT MNITR soft key*

OUTPUT FORMAT

(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)

BAUD RATE

(AUTO, 4800 bps, 38400 bps)

LAT/LON FORMAT

(DD

° MM. MM'

DD ° MM. MMM'

DD ° MM. MMMM')

XTE FORMAT (X.XX, X.XXX)

OUTPUT DESTINATION

CLEAR WINDOW

(YES, NO)

SELECT SNTNC soft key*

PORT MNITR soft key* CLEAR WINDOW

OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK

(Select data sentences to output to NavNet equipment. See * below. All sentences turned off in default setting.)

* = AAM, APB, BOD, BWR(BWC)#1, DPT(DBT)#2, GGA, GLL, GTD,

MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC, VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV, ZTG, TTM

(except in case of OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK)

#1= BWR for rhumb line, BWC for great circle

#2 = DBT for NMEA Ver. 1.5; DPT for NMEA Ver. 2.0

AP-3

APPENDIX

4

DATA

TRANSFER

3

SAVE/

LOAD

DATA

TEST &

CLEAR

HOT PAGE

& NAV DISP

SETUP

MEMORY

I/O TEST

PROCESSOR UNIT TEST

GPS SENSOR TEST*

NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**

ARP TEST***

KEYBOARD TEST

TEST PATTERN

MEMORY

CLEAR

DISPLAY UNIT (YES, NO)

GPS SENSOR (YES, NO)*

NETWORK SOUNDER (YES, NO)**

HOT PAGE SETUP (Configures HOT PAGE 1 to 6.)

NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP (Configures nav data displays.)

NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP

GRAPHIC METER (COMPASS, WIND ANGLE)

DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)

TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)

SIMULATION

SETUP

RADAR (BUILT IN DATA 1, BUILT IN DATA 2, USER DATA, LIVE)

PLOTTER (SIMULATION, LIVE)

SOUNDER (BUILT IN DATA, ETR DATA, LIVE)

SPEED (0.0-99.9 kt)

COURSE (8 FIGURE, DIRECTION 0.0-359.9

°)

LATITUDE (90 °0.0'N-90°0.0'S)

LONGITUDE (180 °0.0'E-180°0.0'W)

START DATE & TIME (hh: mm dd. mmm. yy)

GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA (YES, NO)

* = Requires a FURUNO BB GPS Receiver.

** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N.

*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model 18X4/19X4 series network radar.

SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD

(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,

WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,

SETTING DATA)

LOAD DATA FROM MEMORY CARD

(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,

WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,

SETTING DATA, WALLPAPER)

RECEIVE DATA

VIA NETWORK

HOST NAME (NAVNET1, 2, 3, 4)

MARKS & LINES (ON, OFF)

WAYPOINTS & ROUTES (ON, OFF)

AP-4

APPENDIX

Plotter

MENU Key CHART SETUP CHART OFFSET (Offsets chart position.)

TRACKS

& MARKS

CONTROL

OWN SHIP TRACK DISP (ON, OFF)

OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,

PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)

TARGET TRACKS DISPLAY (ON, OFF, ARP ONLY, AIS ONLY, BOTH)

TARGET TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,

PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)

INTERVAL (TIME, DISTANCE)

TIME INTERVAL (1 - 99m59s)

DISTANCE INTERVAL (0 - 99.99nm/km/sm)

MEMORY (TRACK & MARK) (0 - 8000 points)

TRACK soft key (RESUME, HALT)

ERASE T & M soft key

ERASE ALL TRACKS

ERASE TRACKS BY AREA

ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR

ERASE TARGET TRACKS

ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES

ERASE MARKS BY AREA

MARK SETUP soft key

MARKS/LINES COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,

PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)

= Default setting

MARKS SIZE (LARGE, SMALL)

CHART

CONFIG

(FURUNO,

NavCharts

TM

)

Page 1

Page 2

LAT/LON GRID (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE,

BLUE, WHITE, OFF)

TEXT INFORMATION (ON, OFF)

WAYPOINTS (LARGE, SMALL, OFF)

WAYPOINT NAMES (ON, OFF)

CHART BORDER LINES (ON, OFF)

LIGHT SECTOR INFO (ON, OFF)

OBJECT INFORMATION (OFF, ALL ON, POINTS ON)

CHART DISPLAY (DETAILED, SIMPLE)

NAVAIDS SYMBOL (INTERNATIONAL, US)

CAUTION & ROUTING DATA (ON, OFF)

MARINE FEATURES (ON, OFF)

LAND FEATURES (ON, OFF)

CNTOUR LINE soft key

SPOT SOUNDINGS (ON, OFF)

SAFE CONTOUR SHADING (7, 16, 33, 66 ft)

DEPTH CONTOUR (ALL, 16, 33, 66 ft, OFF)

1

2

AP-5

APPENDIX

1 2

DEPTH CONFIG soft key

Page 2

DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION

(AUTO, MANUAL, NONE)

DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY

(7, 18, 30, 60)

DEPTH LINES & SPOT

SOUNDINGS DISPLAY MODES

(PLOTTER/OVERLAY,

PLOTTER, OFF)

DEPTH LINES & SPOT

SOUNDING DISP

(0 to 99999 m/ft/fa/pb)

ROCKS BOTTOM TYPE DEPTH

DISPLAY

(0 to 99999 m/ft/fa/pb)

(Defaults are for CUSTOM mode.)

CHART

DETAILS

(C-MAP chart)

(See page

7-16.)

PERSPECTIVE (ON, OFF)

DE-CLUTTER (ON, OFF)

CHART DISPLAY MODE (FULL, SIMPLE, FISHING, LOW, CUSTOM)

SAFETY STSTUS (ON, OFF)

WAYPOINT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

WAYPOINT NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

Page 1

NAMES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

BUOYS NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

NAV-AIDS (US, US SIMPLE, INT, INT SIMPLE, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

LIGHT SECTORS (ON, FLASHING, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

ATTENTION AREAS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

TIDES & CURRENTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

SEABED TYPE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

PORTS & SERVICES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

TRACKS & ROUTE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

UNDERWATER OBJECTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

RIVERS & LAKES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

LAND FEATURES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

LANDMARKS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

LAT/LON GRID (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

CHART BOUNDARIES (ON, AUTO, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

MIXING (ON, OFF)

CHART LEVEL (LOCK, UNLOCK)

VALUE-ADDED DATA (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

CAMERA ICON

(

PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)

DEPTH INFO soft key (See left margin.)

PLOTTER

SETUP

3

WAYPOINT SWITCHING (PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL, MANUAL)

COURSE VECTOR (VECTOR, LINE, OFF)

SET GO TO METHOD (1 POINT, 35 POINTS, 35PTS/PORT SVC)

QP (EXT WPT (RMB), INTERNAL)

SAFE ROUTE CHECK (ON, OFF)*

POPUP INFO (OFF, ALL ON, POINTS ON)*

QPT/MARK SOFT KEY (QUICK POINT, MARK ENTRY)*

SHIP SHAPE (BOAT(L), BOAT(S), CIRCLE, CROSS)

D. BOX soft key (Same items as for D. BOX soft key on the RADAR

DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page AP-1.)

*: C-MAP only.

AP-6

APPENDIX

3

WAYPOINTS/

ROUTES

WAYPOINTS LOCAL LIST

ALPHANUMERIC LIST

WAYPOINT BY CURSOR

WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG

GO TO

NEW WPT

EDIT WPT

ERASE WPT

NEW WPT

NEW WPT

START POINT

ROUTES GO TO

NEW ROUTE

EDIT ROUTE

ERASE ROUTE

LOG

Destination is required.

RESTART

STOP/RELEASE

RVRSE/FORWARD

SPEED (Speed for ETA, 0-99 kt, GPS or manual input)

COORD TYPE

FUNCTION

KEY SETUP*

CREATE

VOYAGE-

BASED

ROUTE

NEW (BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST, MANUAL)

SELECT ROUTE

SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5

(OFF, ADD NEW WPT, MOVE WPT, RULER, GO TO WPT, GO TO

ROUTE, EDIT MK/LINE, TRACK ON/OFF, TTM ON/OFF, DEL TGT TRK,

ALPHA LIST, LOCAL LIST, ROUTE LIST, D. BOX ON/OFF,

CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT)

(Assigns function of each plotter function key.)

* Defaut settings for function keys:

SOFT KEY 1, TRACK ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 2, EDIT MK/LINE;

SOFT KEY 3, RULER; SOFT KEY 4, ADD NEW WPT;

SOFT KEY 5, ALPHA LIST

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page AP-2.)

AP-7

APPENDIX

Sounder

MENU Key SOUNDER

MENU

SOUNDER

SYSTEM

SETUP

NOISE LIMITER (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH)

CLUTTER (0-16, AUTO)

WHITE MARKER (1-8 (8-color), 1-16 (16 color), OFF)

ZOOM MARKER (ON, OFF)

HUE (1-9)

SIGNAL LEVEL (OFF, SL1-SL3, 8 color, monochrome, SL1-SL6, 16 color)

PICTURE ADVANCE (2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, STOP)

TEMPERATURE GRAPH (ON, OFF)

PRR LEVEL (0-20, SPD SENSING PRR)

D. BOX soft key (Same items as on RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page AP-1.)

FISH ALARM LEVEL (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW )

TRANSMISSION (OFF, ON)

TVG-HF (0 - 9)

TVG-LF (0 - 9)

ECHO OFFSET-HF (-50 - +50)

ECHO OFFSET-LF (-50 - +50)

BOTTOM LEVEL-HF (-100 - +100)

BOTTOM LEVEL-LF (-100 - +100)

KP PULSE (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)

SMOOTHING (OFF, SM1, SM2, SM3, SM4)

TLL OUTPUT (ON, OFF)

SOUNDER

RANGE

SETUP

FUNCTION

KEY SETUP#

SENSOR SETUP soft key

SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%)

TEMP CALIBRATION (-40 °F - +40°F)

DEPTH CALIBRATION ( -15 - +90 ft)

ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION (-500 - +500m/s)

RANGE 1 - RANGE 8*

ZOOM RANGE (2-120 m, 10 m; 7-400 ft, 50 ft; 1-60 fa, 10 fa; 1-70 P/B, 10 P/B)

BOTTOM LOCK RANGE (3 m, 6 m; 10 ft, 20 ft; 2 fa, 3 fa; 2 P/B, 3 P/B)

SOFT KEY 1- SOFT KEY 5

(OFF, AUTO MODE, GAIN HF, GAIN LF, SHIFT, NOISE LIMITER, CLUTTER,

WHITE MARKER, HUE, SIGNAL LEVEL, PICTURE ADV, TEMP. GRAPH, TVG HF,

TVG LF, OFFSET HF, OFFSET LF, SMOOTHING, ZOOM RANGE, B/L RANGE,

TLL OUTPUT, SNDR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, SAVE

SCREEN, QUICK POINT)

(Assign function of echo sounder function key.)

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page AP-2.)

* = Default sounder ranges

Range 1 Range 2

5 m 10 m

15 ft

3 fa

3 P/B

30 ft

5 fa

5 P/B

Range 3

20 m

Range 4

40 m

Range 5

80 m

Range 6

150 m

Range 7

300 m

Range 8

ETR-6/10N ETR-30N

1200 m

1500 m

60 ft 120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft

4500 ft

10 fa 20 fa 40 fa 80 fa 150 fa 650 fa

900 fa

10 P/B 30 P/B 50 P/B 100 P/B 200 P/B 700 P/B

900 P/B

# Default settings for function keys:

SOFT KEY 1, TLL OUTPUT; SOFT KEY 2, CLUTTER; SOFT KEY 3, SIGNAL LEVEL;

SOFT KEY 4, NOISE LIMITER; SOFT KEY 5, PICTURE ADV

AP-8

EXT VIDEO

MENU Key SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

ALARM key

Radar Alarms

(Same items as on page AP-2.)

ALARM key

Plotter Alarms

SET GUARD 1 (ERASE GUARD 1)

SET GUARD 2 (ERASE GUARD 2)

ALARM key

Sounder Alarms

AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)

ARRIVAL ALARM (ON, OFF)

ANCHOR WATCH ALARM (ON, OFF)

PROXIMITY ALARM (ON, OFF)

XTE ALARM (ON, OFF)

SPEED ALARM (WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, OFF)

TRIP ALARM (ON, OFF)

BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)

TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)

GROUNDING ALARM*

GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*

NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)

CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.) *: C-MAP only

APPENDIX

ALARM key

AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)

BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)

TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)

FISH ALARM (ON, OFF)

FISH ALARM (B/L) (ON, OFF)

NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)

CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)

AP-9

APPENDIX

Geodetic Chart List

001: WGS84

002: WGS72

003: TOKYO : Mean Value (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa)

004: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Mean Value (CONUS)

005: EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Value

006: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australia and Tasmania Island

007: ADINDAN : Mean Value (Ethiopia and Sudan)

008: : Ethiopia

009: : Mall

010: : Senegal

011: : Sudan

012: AFG : Somalia

013: AIN EL ABD 1970 : Bahrain Island

014: ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island

015: ARC 1950 : Mean Value

016: : Botswana

017: : Lesotho

018: : Malawi

019: : Swaziland

020: : Zaire

021: : Zambia

022: : Zimbabwe

023: ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kenya, Tanzania)

024: : Kenya

025: : Tanzania

026: ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island

027: ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island

028: ASTRO B4 SOR. ATOLL : Tem Island

029: ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island

030: ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island

031: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australia and Tasmania Island

032: BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands

033: BERMUDA 1957 : Bermuda Islands

034: BOGOTA OBSERVATORY : Colombia

035: CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina

036: CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands

037: CAPE : South Africa

038: CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama Islands)

039: CARTHAGE : Tunisia

040: CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand)

041: CHUA ASTRO : Paraguay

042: CORREGO ALEGRE : Brazil

043: DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia)

044: DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgia Island)

045: EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island

046: EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Western Europe

047: : Cyprus

048: : Egypt

049: : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland Islands

050: : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands

051: : Greece

052: : Iran

053: : Italy Sardinia

054: : Italy Sicily

055: : Norway and Finland

056: : Portugal and Spain

057: EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value

058: GANDAJIKA BASE : Republic of Maldives

059: GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand

060: GUAM 1963 : Guam Island

061: GUX 1 ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island

062: HJORSEY 1955 : Iceland

063: HONG KONG 1963 : Hong Kong

064: INDIAN : Thailand and Vietnam

065: : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal

066: IRELAND 1956 : Ireland

067: ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia

068: JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Johnston Island

069: KANDAWALA : Sri Lanka

070: KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island

071: KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore

072: LA REUNION : Mascarene Island

073: L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island

074: LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia

075: LUZON : Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island)

076: : Mindanao Island

077: MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island

078: MARCO ASTRO : Salvage Islands

079: MASSAWA : Eritrea (Ethiopia)

080: MERCHICH : Morocco

081: MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 : Midway Island

082: MINNA : Nigeria

083: NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)

084: : United Arab Emirates

085: : Saudi Arabia

086: NAMIBIA : Namibia

087: MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinidad and Tobago

088: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Western United States

089: : Eastern United States

090: : Alaska

091: : Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island)

092: : Bahamas San Salvador Island

093: : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)

094: : Alberta and British Columbia

095: : East Canada

096: : Manitoba and Ontario

097: : Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan

098: : Yukon

099: : Canal Zone

100: : Caribbean

AP-10

101: : Central America

102: : Cuba

103: : Greenland

104: : Mexico

105: NORTH AMERICAN 1983 : Alaska

106: : Canada

107: : CONUS

108: : Mexico, Central America

109: OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)

110: OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt

111: OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value

112: : Hawaii

113: : Kaual

114: : Maui

115: : Oahu

116: OMAN : Oman

117: ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 : Mean Value

118: : England

119: : England, Isle of Man, and Wales

120: : Scotland and Shetland Islands

121: : Wales

122: PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands

123: PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcairn Island

124: PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile (near 53° s)

125: PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value

126: : Bolivia

127: : Chile Northern Chie (near 19° s)

128: : Chile Southern Chile (near 43° s)

129: : Colombia

130: : Ecuador

131: : Guyana

132: : Peru

133: : Venezuela

134: PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands

135: QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar

136: QORNOQ : South Greenland

137: ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands

138: SANTNA BRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)

139: SANTO (DOS) : Espirito Santo Island

140: SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Falkland Island

141: SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value

142: : Argentina

143: : Bolivia

144: : Brazil

145: : Chile

146: : Colombia

147: : Ecuador

148: : Guyana

149: : Paraguay

150: : Peru

151: : Trinidad and Tobago

152: : Venezuela

153: SOUTH ASIA : Singapore

154: SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands

155: SOUTHWEST BASE : Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge, and Terceira Islands

156: TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sadah)

157: TOKYO : Japan

158: : Korea

159: : Okinawa

160: TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha

161: VITI LEVU 1916 : Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands)

162: WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands

163: ZANDERIJ : Suriname

164: BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belitung Islands (Indonesia)

165: CAMP AREA ASTRO : Camp Mcmurdo Area, Antarctica

166: G. SEGARA : Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)

167: HERAT NORTH : Afghanistan

168: HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan

169: TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 : Madagascar

170: YACARE : Uruguay

171: RT-90 : Sweden

172 : Pulkovo 1942 : Russia

APPENDIX

Icons

Icon Meaning

North marker. Points to North.

Correct chart and suitable scale - full chart reliability.

Chart overenlarged.

Plotter, radar, sounder alarm setting violated.

Track is not being recorded or plotted.

Chart offset applied.

S A

V E

Voyage-based route currently being created.

Latitude and longitude position offset applied.

Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low. Contact your dealer about replacement.

S

M

Simulation mode.

AP-11

APPENDIX

This page is intentionally left blank.

AP-12

SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR

MODEL 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB SERIES

1 GENERAL

1.1 Range, Pulse length (PL) & Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR)

Range (nm) Pulse length (

µs)

PRR (Hz approx.)

0.125 to 1.5 0.08 2100

1.5 to 3 0.3 1200

3 to 72* 0.8 600

*Maximum Range: M1824C-BB: 24nm, M1834C-BB: 36nm, M1934C-BB: 48nm,

M1944C-BB: 64nm, M1954C-BB/1964C-BB: 72nm

1.2 Range Resolution M1824C-BB: 10 m, Others: 15 m

1.3 Bearing Resolution M1824C-BB: 5.5°, M1834C-BB: 4.0°, M1934C-BB: 2.4°,

M1944C-BB: 1.9°, M1954C-BB/1964C-BB:

1.9° (XN12A), 1.2° (XN13A)

1.4 Minimum Range M1824C-BB: 27 m, Others: 42 m

±1°

1.6 Range Ring Accuracy 0.9% of range or 8 m, whichever is the greater

1.7 Range, Range Ring Interval (RI), Number of Rings

Range (nm) 0.125 0.25 0.5

0.75

1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72

RI (nm) 0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12

Rings 2 2 5 4 5 4 5 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 5

Maximum range: M1824C-BB: 24nm, M1834C-BB: 36nm, M1934C-BB: 48nm, M1944C-BB: 64nm,

M1954C-BB/1964C-BB: 72nm

2.1 MODEL1824C-BB:

2.1.1 Radiator

2.1.2 Polarization

2.1.3 Antenna Rotation

2.1.4 Radiator Length

Micro-strip

Horizontal

30/24 rpm nominal (for short/long range)

46 cm

2.1.6 Vertical 25°

2.1.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -19 dB or less (within ±20º of main-lobe)

-21 dB or less (±20º of main-lobe or more)

2.2 MODEL1834C-BB:

2.2.1 Radiator

2.2.2 Polarization

2.2.3 Antenna Rotation

Printed waveguide array

Horizontal

24 rpm nominal

SP - 1

2.2.4 Radiator Length 60 cm

2.2.6 Vertical 20°

2.2.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -18 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)

-23 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)

2.3 MODEL1934-BB:

2.3.1 Radiator

2.3.2 Polarization

2.3.3 Antenna Rotation

2.3.4 Radiator Length

Slotted waveguide array

Horizontal

24 or 48 rpm nominal

100 cm (XN10)

2.3.6 Vertical 27°

2.3.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -20 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)

-28 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)

2.4 MODEL1944C-BB:

2.4.1 Radiator

2.4.2 Polarization

2.4.3 Antenna Rotation

2.4.4 Radiator Length

Slotted waveguide array

Horizontal

24 or 48 rpm nominal

120 cm (XN12)

2.4.6 Vertical 22°

2.4.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -24 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)

-30 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)

2.5 MODEL1954C-BB/1964C-BB:

2.5.1 Radiator Slotted waveguide array

2.5.2 Polarization

2.5.3 Antenna Rotation

Horizontal

24 or 48 rpm nominal

2.5.4 Radiator Length 120 cm (XN12), 180 cm (XN13, 24rpm only)

2.5.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 1.9° (XN12), 1.2° (XN13)

2.5.6 Vertical 22°

XN12:

XN13:

-24 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)

-30 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)

-24 dB or less (within ±10° of main-lobe)

-30 dB or less (±10° of main-lobe or more)

SP - 2

3.1 Frequency and Modulation 9410 MHz ±30MHz (X band), P0N

3.2 Peak Output Power M1824C-BB: 2.2 kW nominal

M1834C-BB /1934C-BB: 4 kW nominal

M1944C-BB: 6 kW nominal

M1954C-BB: 12 kW nominal

M1964C-BB: 25 kW nominal

3.3 Modulator FET Switching Method

3.4 Intermediate Frequency 60 MHz

3.5 Tuning

3.6 Receiver Front End

3.7 Bandwidth

3.8 Duplexer

3.9 Warming up

4 INTERFACE

Automatic or manual

MIC (Microwave IC)

Tx pulselength 0.08

µs and 0.3 µs: 25 MHz

Tx pulselength 0.8

µs: 3 MHz

Circulator with diode limiter

90 s approx.

4.1 Input Data

Own ship’s position:

IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0)

GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL

Ship’s speed:

Bearing (True):

Bearing (Magnetic):

RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW

HDT>HDG

*1

>HDM

*1

>VHW

HDM>HDG

*1

>HDT

*1

>VHW

Course: RMC>RMA>VTG

Water depth: DPT>DBT>DBS>DBK

Wind: MWV>VWT>VWR

Water Temperature: MTW

Time: ZDA

*1

: calculated by magnetic deviation

4.2 Output Data

Alarm signal

NMEA 0183 Ver1.5

12 VDC, 100 mA or less

GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)

RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW,

MTW, DPT or DBT, DBS (ETR required),

TLL (L/L, Heading data required), TTM (ARPA required)

SP - 3

5.1 Projection

5.2 Usable Area

5.3 Effective Area

5.4 Display pixels

Mercator

85 latitude or below

211.2 x 158.4 mm

640 x 480 dots

Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP

5.6 Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)

5.7 Track Display Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 59 sec.) or by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)

5.8 Colors

5.9 Memory Capacity

5.10 Storage Capacity

Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white

Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points

Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each

M1824C-BB

M1834C-BB

12-24 VDC: 5.5-2.7 A

12-24 VDC: 5.3-2.6 A

M1934C-BB (24rpm) 12-24 VDC: 5.6-2.7 A

M1934C-BB (48rpm) 12-24 VDC: 7.5-3.6 A

M1944C-BB (24rpm) 12-24 VDC: 6.3-3.1 A

M1944C-BB (48rpm) 12-24 VDC: 8.1-3.8 A

M1954C-BB (24rpm) 12-24 VDC: 8.6-4.3 A

M1954C-BB (48rpm) 12-24 VDC: 10.3-5.1 A

M1964C-BB (24rpm) 12-24 VDC: 10.1-5.0 A

M1964C-BB (48rpm) 12-24 VDC: 11.6-5.6 A

6.2 Rectifier (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz

7.1 Ambient Temperature Antenna Unit: -25°C to +70°C

Processor Unit and Control Unit: -15°C to +55°C

Power Supply Unit: -15°C to +55°C

7.2 Relative Humidity 93 % or less at +40°C

7.3 Waterproofing Antenna Unit: IPX6

Control Unit: IPX5 (Front panel), IPX2 (Rear panel)

Processor Unit, Power Supply Unit: IPX0

7.4 Vibration IEC 60945-4 th

- 2 Hz-5Hz and up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of ±1 mm ±10%

(7 m/s

2

maximum acceleration at 13.2 Hz);

- above 13.2 Hz and up to 100 Hz with a constant maximum acceleration of 7 m/s

2

.

SP - 4

N3.0

M1824C-BB/1834C-BB N9.5 (upper), 2.5PB3.5/10 (lower)

M1934C-BB/1944C-BB/

1954C-BB/1964C-BB N9.5

SP - 5

SPECIFICATIONS OF VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1920C-BB

1.1 Projection

1.2 Usable Area

1.3 Effective Area

1.4 Display pixels

Mercator

85 latitude or below

211.2 x 158.4 mm

640 x 480 dots

Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP

1.6 Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)

1.7 Track Display Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 59 sec.) or by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)

1.8 Colors

1.9 Memory Capacity

1.10 Storage Capacity

1.11 MOB

1.12 Quick Routes

1.13 Electronic Chart

1.14 Alarms

Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white

Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points

Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each

1 point

1 course with 35 waypoints max.

SD card - FURUNO or NAVIONICS Gold Chart card, or

C-MAP eNt+ chart card

Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,

Trip alarm, Fish alarm, Bottom alarm (ETR required), Grounding

alarm

2.1 Rated Voltage/Current 12-24 VDC: 2.1-1.1 A (3.1-1.6 A)

2.2.1 Rectifier (option) PR-62: 100/110/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz

3.1 Ambient Temperature -15°C to +55°C

3.2 Relative Humidity 93% or less at +40°C

3.3 Waterproofing

3.4 Vibration IEC 60945-4 th

IPX5

- 2 Hz-5Hz and up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of ±1 mm ±10%

(7 m/s

2

maximum acceleration at 13.2 Hz);

- above 13.2 Hz and up to 100 Hz with a constant maximum acceleration of 7 m/s

2

.

N3.0

SP - 6

INDEX

Ａ

A/C RAIN.....................................................2-4

A/C SEA ......................................................2-3

ACQ soft key .............................................2-27

AIS lost target ................................................5-5 number of targets to display....................5-3 past position display................................5-8 proximity alarm........................................5-6 symbols ...................................................5-3 target data ...............................................5-4 turning on/off ...........................................5-1 turning track on/off ..................................5-7 vector time...............................................5-7

ALARM key plotter ....................................................3-47 radar......................................................2-22 sounder .................................................4-15

Alarms anchor watch.........................................3-49 arrival ....................................................3-47 audio .....................................................3-47 bottom ...................................................4-16

CPA/TCPA..................................... 2-32, 5-5 fish.........................................................4-16 fish(B/L).................................................4-17 guard .....................................................2-22 lost target ..............................................2-33 messages..............................................3-54 messages (plotter) ................................3-53 messages (sounder) .............................4-18 proximity................................................3-51 speed ....................................................3-50 trip .........................................................3-51 water temperature .................................4-17

XTE (cross track error)..........................3-50

Anchor watch alarm ..................................3-49

Anemometer display ...................................3-5

Antenna height (FURUNO BB

GPS receiver) .......................................7-27

ARP acquisition of targets .............................2-27 activating ...............................................2-27

ARP SETUP menu................................2-27

CPA/TCPA alarm ........................... 2-32, 5-5 data....................................................... 2-31 deactivating .......................................... 2-27 lost target alarm.................................... 2-33 past position display ...................... 2-31, 5-8 test.......................................................... 8-9 tracking termination .............................. 2-29 vector.................................................... 2-30

Arrival alarm ............................................. 3-47

A-scope display .......................................... 4-5

Audio alarm .............................................. 3-47

Auto course-up mode ................................. 3-8

AUTO S.SPD soft key .............................. 2-14

AUTO/D. BOX soft key ............................... 4-7

Ｂ

Battery replacement ................................... 8-2

Bearing measurement by EBL ................. 2-10

Bearing reference ....................................... 7-4

Bottom alarm ............................................ 4-16

Bottom discrimination display..................... 4-5

Bottom echo ............................................. 4-20

Bottom-lock display .................................... 4-4

Bottom-zoom display.................................. 4-4

Ｃ

CHART DETAILS menu............................ 7-14

CHART OFFSET soft key......................... 7-13

Charts

C-MAP chart attributes ......................... 7-15 cursor and data display (C-MAP) ......... 3-14 data for aids to navigation .................... 3-11 icon data (C-MAP) ................................ 3-15 icons ....................................................... 3-9 indices .................................................. 3-10 inserting .................................................. 1-3

Navionics chart attributes ..................... 7-14 offsetting ............................................... 7-13 port service icons.................................. 3-11 tide information (C-MAP) ...................... 3-16

CLEAR ALARM soft key ........................... 4-18

Clutter rejector .......................................... 4-10

C-MAP charts attributes............................................... 7-15 cursor and data display ........................ 3-14 icon data ............................................... 3-15

IN-1

INDEX tide information .....................................3-16

Cold start (FURUNO BB

GPS receiver) .......................................7-27

Colors radar display ...........................................7-6 radar echoes ...........................................7-6 sounder echoes ....................................4-14

Compass display.........................................3-3

Controls control unit ..............................................1-1

Course-up mode plotter ......................................................3-8 radar........................................................2-7

CPA/TCPA alarm................................2-32, 5-5

Cursor display format..........................................7-5 shifting...................................................1-10

CURSOR soft key .....................................2-12

Ｄ

Data boxes erasing ..................................................1-12 hiding ....................................................1-12 rearranging............................................1-12 setup .....................................................7-21 showing.................................................1-12

Deleting memory cards ...............................6-1

Depth measurement ...................................4-9

Depth source...............................................7-4

Depth unit....................................................7-3

Diagnostics

ARP test..................................................8-9

GPS sensor test......................................8-8 keyboard test ........................................ 8-11 network sounder test...............................8-9 processor unit test...................................8-8 test menu ................................................8-7 test pattern ............................................8-10

DISP key .....................................................1-7

Display modes ............................................1-6

DISPLY MODE soft key ..............................4-1

Ｅ

E. AVG soft key .........................................2-20

E. STR soft key .........................................2-19

EBL soft key ..............................................2-10

EBL/VRM key.................. 2-9, 2-10, 2-15, 2-16

Echo averaging .........................................2-20

Echo offset (sounder)................................7-32

IN-2

Echo stretch ............................................. 2-19

Echo trails color...................................................... 2-18 mode..................................................... 2-19 starting.................................................. 2-18 time....................................................... 2-17

EDIT XT-LMT soft key ......................... 3-4, 3-6

Error messages ........................................ 8-14

ETA calculation......................................... 3-45

Ｆ

Fish alarm sensitivity.............................................. 7-31 setting................................................... 4-16

Fish alarm (B/L)........................................ 4-17

Fish school echo ...................................... 4-21

Fix mode (FURUNO BB

GPS receiver)....................................... 7-27

FREQ LF/HF soft key ................................. 4-2

Function keys function execution ................................ 1-13 setup (plotter) ........................................7-11 setup (radar)........................................... 7-8 setup (sounder) .................................... 7-36

FURUNO BB GPS receiver setup ............ 7-25

Fuse replacement....................................... 8-2

Ｇ

GAIN key radar ....................................................... 2-2 sounder .................................................. 4-8

GENERAL SETUP menu ........................... 7-1

Geodetic datum (FURUNO BB

GPS receiver)....................................... 7-25

Geodetic datum codes ................................8-x

GPS sensor (FURUNO BB GPS receiver) test........................................... 8-8

GPS SETUP menu................................... 7-25

GPS status display ................................... 8-12

Grounding alarm report .................................................... 3-54 setting................................................... 3-52

Guard alarm cancelling ............................................. 2-23 setting................................................... 2-22

Ｈ

Heading line ..............................................2-11

Head-up mode............................................ 2-7

HIDE/SHOW key.........................................1-2

Highway display ..........................................3-6

HIWAY CNTRL soft key ..............................3-6

HL OFF soft key ........................................ 2-11

Hot page setup..........................................7-22

Hue sounder .................................................4-14

Ｉ

I. REJ. soft key ..........................................2-12

Icons....................................................... AP-11

Interference rejection radar......................................................2-11 sounder .................................................4-10

Ｋ

Keyboard test............................................ 8-11

Keying pulse .............................................7-32

Ｌ

Language ....................................................7-2

Latitude, longitude display ..........................7-4

Lines entering .................................................3-23 erasing ..................................................3-26 type .......................................................3-24

LOAD DATA menu ......................................6-3

Lost target alarm .......................................2-33

Ｍ

Magnetic variation.......................................7-4

Maintenance battery replacement ................................8-2 fuse replacement.....................................8-2 preventive................................................8-1

Trackball..................................................8-3

Marker-zoom display...................................4-3

Marks color ......................................................3-24 entering .................................................3-23 erasing all..............................................3-25 erasing individual ..................................3-25 shape ....................................................3-24

Memory clearing..................................................8-13 testing......................................................8-7

Memory cards deleting....................................................6-1 error messages .......................................6-2 playing back ............................................6-3

INDEX saving data to ......................................... 6-2

Memory I/O test .......................................... 8-7

Messages memory cards......................................... 6-2 plotter alarms........................................ 3-53 sounder alarms..................................... 4-18

MOB mark ................................................ 1-11

Multiple echoes (radar)............................. 2-34

Ｎ

Nav data display ......................................... 3-7

NAV DATA menu....................................... 7-30

Nav data window ........................................ 3-1

Nav graphic display anemometer display ............................... 3-5 compass display ..................................... 3-3

NAV OPTION menu.................................. 7-23

Navigation canceling route navigation.................... 3-46 port, port services ................................. 3-41 quick point ............................................ 3-39 restarting............................................... 3-44 routes.................................................... 3-43 switching waypoints in a route.............. 3-45 waypoints.............................................. 3-41

Navigator setup ............................... 7-23, 7-25

NavNet image source .......................................... 1-9 receiving data from ................................. 6-4

Network sounder test.................................. 8-9

NEXT INFO soft key ........................ 3-53, 4-18

Noise limiter (sounder) ............................. 4-10

Noise rejection (radar) .............................. 2-11

North marker............................................. 2-11

North-up mode plotter...................................................... 3-8 radar ....................................................... 2-7

Ｏ

Offset EBL ................................................ 2-15

OFFSET soft key ............................. 2-15, 2-16

Ｐ

Picture advance speed............................. 4-12

PLOTTER SETUP menu .......................... 7-10

PLOTTR CNTRL soft key ........................... 1-8

Port, port services icons ..................................................... 3-11

Position smoothing (FURUNO BB

GPS receiver) ....................................... 7-26

IN-3

INDEX

POWER/TX key ..........................................1-4

Presentation mode plotter ......................................................3-8 radar........................................................2-6

Processor unit test ......................................8-8

Proximity alarm plotter ....................................................3-51

Proximity alarm (AIS) ..................................5-6

Pulselength (radar) .....................................2-5

Ｒ

Racon........................................................2-36

RADAR SETTING menu.............................7-4

RADAR TX/ST-BY soft key .........................2-1

Range measurement by cursor (radar) ..............2-8 measurement by range rings (radar) ......2-8 measurement by VRM (radar) ................2-9 plotter ......................................................3-9 radar........................................................2-5 setup (radar) ...........................................7-7 setup (sounder).....................................7-35 unit of measurement ...............................7-2

RANGE key plotter ......................................................3-9 radar........................................................2-5 sounder ...................................................4-7

Remote controller testing ................................................... 8-11

RESET XTE soft key............................3-4, 3-6

RINGS soft key ...........................................2-8

Routes cancelling navigation of.........................3-46 connecting.............................................3-36 entering with cursor...............................3-34 entering with existing waypoints ...........3-33 erasing ..................................................3-39 following ................................................3-43 inserting waypoint from plotter display...............................................3-38 inserting waypoint from route list ..........3-37 removing waypoint from........................3-39 voyage based........................................3-34

Ｓ

SART ........................................................2-35

Satellite disable (FURUNO BB

GPS receiver) .......................................7-27

SAVE DATA menu.......................................6-1

IN-4

SAVE/MOB key .........................................1-11

Second-track echoes (radar).................... 2-24

Sensor setup ............................................ 7-32

SENSOR SETUP menu ........................... 7-34

SENSOR SETUP soft key........................ 7-32

Shadow sector.......................................... 2-35

Shift automatic (radar) .................................. 2-14 manual (radar)...................................... 2-14 sounder .................................................. 4-8

SHIFT soft key................................... 2-14, 4-8

Sidelobe echoes....................................... 2-34

Signal level erasure (sounder) ..................4-11

SIM SETUP menu .................................... 1-14

Simulation display .................................... 1-14

Smoothing echoes (sounder) ................... 7-32

SNDR CNTRL soft key ............................... 1-8

Soft keys..................................................... 1-2

Speed alarm ............................................. 3-50

Speed display ............................................. 7-4

Speed/course smoothing (FURUNO

BB GPS receiver) ................................. 7-26

SPLIT soft key ............................................ 4-6

System configuration......................................x

SYSTEM SETUP menu (sounder) ........... 7-31

Ｔ

TARGET INFO soft key ............................ 2-31

TARGET soft key...................................... 2-17

TD display .................................................. 7-3

TD setup

Decca ................................................... 7-29

Loran C................................................. 7-29

TD SETUP menu...................................... 7-28

Test menu................................................... 8-7

Test pattern............................................... 8-10

Time measurement (sounder) .................... 4-9

Time notation.............................................. 7-4

TLL data output (radar)............................. 2-21

TLL OUTPUT key ..................................... 2-21

Track displaying other targets'................. 3-18, 5-7 displaying own ship's............................ 3-18 erasing all own ship's ........................... 3-23 erasing all targets’.............................. 3-23 erasing own ship's by area ................... 3-22 erasing own ship's by color .................. 3-22 memory distribution setting .................. 3-21 plotting interval ..................................... 3-20

plotting method......................................3-20 plotting of own ship's.............................3-19

TRACK HALT soft key...............................3-19

TRACK RESUME soft key ........................3-19

Trackball cleaning...................................................8-3 operation ...............................................1-10

TRAIL COLOR soft key.............................2-18

TRAIL ON/OFF soft key ............................2-18

TRAIL soft key...........................................2-17

TRAIL TIME soft key .................................2-17

Trip alarm ..................................................3-51

Trip distance resetting...............................3-55

Troubleshooting general ....................................................8-4 plotter ......................................................8-5 radar........................................................8-4 sounder ...................................................8-6

True motion mode .......................................2-7

Tuning .........................................................2-2

TVG...........................................................7-32

Tx sector (radar) .........................................7-5

Ｖ

Vector (ARP) .............................................2-30

Virtual image .............................................2-34

VRM (Variable Range Marker) radar........................................................2-9 sounder ...................................................4-9

VRM soft key...............................................2-9

Ｗ

W. MAN soft key........................................2-24

WAAS setup (FURUNO BB GPS receiver) ................................................7-28

Watchman .................................................2-23

Water temperature alarm ..........................4-17

Water temperature graph ..........................4-19

Water temperature unit ...............................7-4

Waypoint marker (radar) ...........................2-25

Waypoints changing size ........................................3-31 color ......................................................3-27 editing from waypoint list.......................3-29 editing waypoint position.......................3-30 editing with cursor .................................3-30 entering at own ship position ................3-26 entering by range and bearing ..............3-28

INDEX entering with cursor .............................. 3-26 erasing from the menu.......................... 3-31 erasing from waypoint list ..................... 3-31 erasing with cursor ............................... 3-30 navigating to ......................................... 3-41 searching .............................................. 3-32 shape.................................................... 3-27 switching in route navigation ................ 3-45

White marker ............................................ 4-12

WPT MK soft key...................................... 2-25

Ｘ

XTE (cross track error) alarm ................... 3-50

XTE monitor......................................... 3-4, 3-6

Ｚ

Zero line.................................................... 4-20

Zoom ........................................................ 2-12

ZOOM/D. BOX soft key ............................ 2-13

IN-5